nari pcs 974 transformer auxiliary relay

212

Click here to load reader

Upload: toing

Post on 05-Feb-2016

339 views

Category:

Documents


83 download

DESCRIPTION

NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

PCS-974

Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Page 2: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay
Page 3: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay I Date: 2013-05-17

Preface

Introduction

This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide

full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.

Documentation for equipment ordered from NR Electric Co., Ltd. is dispatched separately from

manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided

to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the

recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this

manual, and read relevant chapters carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before

installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that

equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of

the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger

personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,

proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and

servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the

system to which it is being connected;

Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety

engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to

isolate, ground, and label it;

Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering

practices;

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Page 4: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay II Date: 2013-05-17

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

DANGER means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will

occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

WARNING means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur

if safety precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety

precautions are disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to

resulting damage of the protected equipment.

WARNING!

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please

make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.

WARNING!

During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.

Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.

Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These

personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as

well as safety regulations.

In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must

be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.

DANGER!

Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be

opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high

voltage.

WARNING!

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high

voltage generated is dangerous

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the power supply. It

takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.

Page 5: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay III Date: 2013-05-17

CAUTION!

Earthing

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the

specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the power supply to the equipment, check that they

conform to the equipment ratings.

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the power supply to the equipment is

on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check

the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright

Version: 2.01

P/N: EN_YJBH5200.0086.0202

Copyright © NR 2013. All rights reserved

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com

Email: [email protected]

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination

to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If

nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

Page 6: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay IV Date: 2013-05-17

Page 7: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay V Date: 2013-05-17

Documentation Structure

The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set

of instructions for the relay’s use and application.

The chapter contents are summarized as below:

1 Introduction

Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.

2 Technical Data

Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical

specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type

tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.

3 Operation Theory

Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.

4 Supervision

Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.

5 Management

Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.

6 Hardware

Introduce the main function carried out by each module of this relay and providing the definition of

pins of each module.

7 Settings

List settings including equipment settings, communication settings, description settings, display

settings, logic link settings and etc., and some notes about the setting application.

8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the

user how to use this relay through the HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view

through the HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.

9 Communication

Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, the IEC60970-5-103,

IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.

10 Installation

Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A

guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating

Page 8: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay VI Date: 2013-05-17

earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.

11 Commissioning

Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of

this relay.

12 Maintenance

A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.

14 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously

derived from the illustration.

The following symbols are used in drawings:

&

AND gate

≥1

OR gate

Comparator

BI

Binary signal via opto-coupler

SET I>

Input signal from comparator with setting

EN

Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG

Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

OTH

Input of other signal

XXX

Output signal

Page 9: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay VII Date: 2013-05-17

t

t

Timer

Timer (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)

10ms 0ms

Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (0ms), non-settable]

[t1] 0ms

Timer (t1: delay pickup, settable)

0ms [t2]

Timer (t2: delay dropoff, settable)

[t1] [t2]

Timer (t1: delay pickup, t2: delay dropoff, settable)

IDMT

Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

*

*

Instrument current transformer

Instrument voltage transformer

Page 10: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

Preface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay VIII Date: 2013-05-17

Page 11: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

1 Introduction

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-a

Date: 2013-05-17

1 Introduction

Table of Contents

1.1 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-1

1.4 Features ............................................................................................................ 1-2

List of Figures

Figure 1.2-1 Typical Application ............................................................................................... 1-1

Page 12: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

1 Introduction

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-b

Date: 2013-05-17

Page 13: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

1 Introduction

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-1

Date: 2013-05-17

1.1 Application

1.2 Application

The PCS-974 relay is a transformer auxiliary relay applied for the protection of a transformer,

which provides mechanical protection, pole disagreement protection and breaker failure initiation.

Mechanical signal could be configured as thermal, gas, oil temperature, winding temperature,

pressure, oil level and so on.

52

52 52

PCS-974

DFRMR

MR: Mechanical protection

50BF: Breaker failure initiation

62PD: Pole disagreement protection

DFR: Disturbance&fault recorder

Mechanical signal

from transformer

50BF 62PD

Figure 1.2-1 Typical Application

1.3 Functions

Mechanical protection (26: oil and winding temperature; 63: gas, pressure; 71: oil level; etc)

Breaker failure initiation (50BF)

Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

CT circuit failure supervision(CTS)

Power supervision of mechanical protection

Self diagnostic test

GPS time synchronization

Page 14: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

1 Introduction

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-2 Date: 2013-05-17

Perfect fault recording function

Event Recorder including 1024 status change of binary input reports, 1024 alarm

reports and 1024 latest user operation records

Disturbance recorder including 64 fault reports, and 64 waveforms, and file format of

waveform is compatible with international COMTRADE91 and COMTRADE99 file. Up to

200 binary inputs can be recorded, and three oscillograph triggering mode are

supported, which are protection triggering, manual triggering, remote triggering through

PCS-EXPLORER software.

Communication ports

RS-485 ports and Ethernet ports supporting with IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850-8-1

protocol.

Rear RS-485 with clock synchronization.

One rear RS-232 or RS-485 with printer

One front RS-232 port for debuging

GOOSE communication function (optional module)

1.4 Features

On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and logic

discrimination could be done within one sampling period. The event recording and protection

logic calculation are completed simultaneously.

20x3 channels of mechanical signal input are provided for instantaneous tripping, and among

which 4x3 singnals for tripping with time delay.

Power supply of mechanical quantity input circuit is monitored.

Friendly HMI Interface

The HMI interface with a LCD and a 9-button keypad on the front panel is very friendly to the

user.

Various Clock Synchronizations

Various GPS clock synchronizations: PPS(pulse per second)/PPM(pulse per minitue),

message via communication ports and IRIG-B synchronization.

Page 15: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-a Date: 2013-05-17

2 Technical Data

Table of Contents

2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.2 Binary Input ........................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.1.3 Binary Output ...................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Mechanical Specifications .............................................................................. 2-2

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-2

2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-2

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.4.2 Ethernet Port ...................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.4.4 Print Port ............................................................................................................................. 2-3

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-3

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-4

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ........................................................................................................... 2-4

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................ 2-4

2.5.3 Electrical Tests .................................................................................................................... 2-4

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................ 2-4

2.6 Management Functions ................................................................................... 2-5

2.6.1 Clock Performance ............................................................................................................. 2-5

2.6.2 Binary Input Signal ............................................................................................................. 2-5

2.7 Protective Functions ....................................................................................... 2-5

2.7.1 Breaker Failure Initiation ..................................................................................................... 2-5

2.7.2 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................ 2-5

2.7.3 Mechanical Protection ........................................................................................................ 2-6

2.8 Certifications .................................................................................................... 2-6

Page 16: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-b Date: 2013-05-17

Page 17: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-1 Date: 2013-05-17

2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008

Rated Voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc

Variation 80~300Vdc

Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage

Burden

Quiescent condition

Operating condition

<25W

<30W

2.1.2 Binary Input

Rated Voltage 24Vdc 48Vdc 110Vdc 125Vdc 220Vdc 250Vdc

Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA

Pickup voltage 13V~17V 26V~34V 60.5V~77V 70~87.5V 121V~154V

Dropout voltage 50% of pickup voltage

Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc 300Vdc

Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)

Resolving time for logic input <1ms

2.1.3 Binary Output

Output type Tripping contact Signal contact

Output mode Potential free contact

Continuous carry 5A@380Vac

5A@250Vdc

8A@380Vac

8A@250Vdc

Pickup time <8ms (typical 3ms) <10ms

Dropoff time <5ms <10ms

Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)

0.65A@48Vdc

0.30A@110Vdc

0.15A@220Vdc

1.20A@48Vdc

0.50A@110Vdc

0.25A@220Vdc

Burden 300mW 400mW

Maximal system voltage 380Vac

250Vdc

380Vac

250Vdc

Test voltage across open

contact 1000V RMS for 1min 1000V RMS for 1min

Short duration current

6A@3s

[email protected]

[email protected]

10A@3s

[email protected]

[email protected]

Durability 10,000 operations minimum 10,000 operations minimum

NOTE! Signal output contacts include watchdog contacts.

Page 18: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-2 Date: 2013-05-17

NOTE! Tripping output contacts are not connected to trip circuit breakers directly. They are

connected to interposing relays or lockout relays contacts which are connected to trip

circuit breakers.

2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Mounting Way Flush mounted

Housing color Silver grey

Weight per device Approx. 30 (kg)

Housing material Aluminum alloy

Location of terminal Rear panel of the device

Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate

Protection class

Standard IEC 60255-1:2009

Front side IP40, up to IP51 (With cover)

Other sides IP30

Rear side, connection

terminals IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Standard IEC 60225-1: 2009

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)

Transport and storage

temperature range -40°C to +70°C

Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation

Pollution degree 2

Altitude <3000m

2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port

Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Maximal capacity 32

Transmission distance <500m

Safety level Isolation to ELV level

Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable

2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45 ST, SC (Multi mode)

Transmission rate 100Mbits/s

Page 19: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-3 Date: 2013-05-17

Transmission standard 10Base-T/100Base-TX 100Base-FX

Transmission distance <100m <2km (1310nm)

Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850

Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level

Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST

Fibre type Multi mode

Transmission distance <2km

Wave length 1310nm

Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm

Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type LC

Fibre type Multi mode

Transmission distance <2km

Wave length 1310nm

Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm

Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232

Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Printer type EPSON® 300K printer

Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485

Transmission distance <500m

Maximal capacity 32

Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B

Safety level Isolation to ELV level

Page 20: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-4 Date: 2013-05-17

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007

Damp heat test, cyclic Per IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Standard IEC 60255-27:2005

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

Standard IEC 60255-5:2000

Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV

Overvoltage category III

Insulation resistance

measurements Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

1MHz burst disturbance test

IEC 60255-22-1:2007

Common mode: class III 2.5kV

Differential mode: class III 1.0kV

Electrostatic discharge test

IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV

For contact discharge: 8kV

For air discharge: 15kV

Radio frequency interference

tests

IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III

Frequency sweep

Radiated amplitude-modulated

10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz

Spot frequency

Radiated amplitude-modulated

10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz

Radiated pulse-modulated

10V/m (rms), f=900MHz

Fast transient disturbance

tests

IEC 60255-22-4:2008

Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns

Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns

Surge immunity test

Per IEC 60255-22-5:2008

Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us

Common mode: 4kV

Differential mode: 2kV

Page 21: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-5 Date: 2013-05-17

Conducted RF

Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6:2001

Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150 kHz~80MHz

Power Frequency Magnetic

Field Immunity

IEC 61000-4-8:2001

class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s

Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-9:2001

class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s

Damped oscillatory magnetic

field immunity

IEC 61000-4-10:2001

class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

Auxiliary power supply

performance

IEC60255-11: 2008

Voltage dips: Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset

Voltage short interruptions: 100ms for interruption without rebooting

2.6 Management Functions

2.6.1 Clock Performance

Real time clock accuracy ≤ 3s/day

Accuracy of GPS synchronization ≤ 1ms

External time synchronization IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, SNTP protocol

2.6.2 Binary Input Signal

Resolution of binary input signal ≤ 1ms

Binary input mode Potential-free contact

Resolution of SOE ≤ 2ms

2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Breaker Failure Initiation

Range of phase current setting 0.04A~150A

Range of zero sequence current setting 0.04A~150A

Range of negative sequence current setting 0.04A~150A

Time setting range 0s~360s

Current setting tolerance ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater

Time setting tolerance ≤1% of setting + 40ms

2.7.2 Pole Disagreement Protection

Time setting range 0s~360s

Time setting tolerance ≤1% of setting + 40ms

Control elements

Range of zero sequence current setting 0.04A~150A

Range of negative sequence current setting 0.04A~150A

Time setting range 0s~360s

Page 22: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

2 Technical Data

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-6 Date: 2013-05-17

Current setting tolerance ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater

2.7.3 Mechanical Protection

Time setting range of MR1~MR4 0s ~1200s

Time setting tolerance ≤1% of setting+ 40ms

2.8 Certifications

ISO9001: 2008

ISO14001:2004

OHSAS18001: 2007

ISO10012:2003

CMMI L4

EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999

Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1: 2001

Page 23: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-a Date: 2013-05-17

3 Operation Theory

Table of Contents

3.1 Mechanical Protection (MR) ............................................................................ 3-1

3.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.2 Tripping Directly .................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.3 Tripping with Time Delay ..................................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.4 Logic of MR Trip with Time Delay ....................................................................................... 3-3

3.2 Pole Disagreement Protection (PD) ............................................................... 3-4

3.2.1 Control Element .................................................................................................................. 3-5

3.2.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.3 Breaker Failure Initiation (50BF) .................................................................... 3-7

3.3.1 Operation Criteria ............................................................................................................... 3-7

3.3.2 Control Element .................................................................................................................. 3-8

3.3.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.4 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS) ......................................................................... 3-9

List of Figures

Figure 3.1-2 Trip Directly ........................................................................................................ 3-1

Figure 3.1-3 Trip with Time Delay .......................................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3.1-4 Logic of MR1 ...................................................................................................... 3-3

Figure 3.1-5 Logical of MR2 (or MR3) protection ................................................................. 3-4

Figure 3.2-1 Logical of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-6

Figure 3.3-1 Logical diagram of breaker failure initiation .................................................... 3-8

Page 24: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-b Date: 2013-05-17

Page 25: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-1 Date: 2013-05-17

3.1 Mechanical Protection (MR)

3.1.1 Overview

When the mechanical signal from transformer mechanical relay (MR) arrives at PCS-974, it

repeats the mechanical signal to annunciation signal, remote signal, and disturbance&fault

recording (DFR) signal, and trip signals. Simultaneously, the relay stores the state change of a

binary input of MR signal, the repeated alarm signal and the repeated operation signal.

According to the difference of the importance of mechanical signals transformer MR protection, the

mechanical signals are classified into three groups: mechanical signals for warning, mechanical

signals for tripping with delay, and mechanical signals for direct tripping.

For the mechanical signal for warning, such as light gas signal, the relay repeats the mechanical

signal for those warning signals. For the mechanical signal for tripping with delay, besides those

warning signals, the relay issues tripping signal with time delay to make tripping output relay

operate simultaneously. For the mechanical signals for direct tripping, besides those warning

signals, the relay issues tripping signal directly simultaneously.

Mechanical signals MR1~MR20 (three phase signals) of PCS-974FG relay are not controlled by

the relay’s CPU, which means that when the mechanical signal arrives, the relay will issue the

corresponding warning signals. Besides, the relay can operate to trip directly at the same time if

the input terminals of RLY module are connected to the corresponding tripping signal contact.

Besides, among 20x3 mechanical signals, mechanical signal MR1~MR4 (three phase signals) can

be controlled by the relay CPU, i.e. those mechanical signals are repeated to trip after a delay with

warning signals being issued simultaneously.

3.1.2 Tripping Directly

When any of mechanical signals (MR1~MR20, three phase signals) arrives at the PCS-974FG, it

requires the device to initiate a trip command immediately without any time delay. The wiring

schematic is seen in Figure 3.1-1. As soon as the normal open contact of transformer MR is closed,

the PCS-974FG starts trip command right away. At the same time, the device issues annunciation

signal, remote signal and DFR signal via corresponding terminals.

Tripping

Contact from

Transformer MR

AUX-

Annunciation Signal

Remote Signal

DFR Signal

Figure 3.1-1 Trip Directly

Page 26: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-2 Date: 2013-05-17

NOTE: When any one phase signal of the mechanical signals MR1, MR2, … MR20

arrive, associated normal open contact of binary output relay is closed to issue a trip

command. It will not drop off until the mechanical signal is gone.

3.1.3 Tripping with Time Delay

Occasionally, when some mechanical fault happens, such as power failure of transformer cooling

system, after the fault is isolated by associated MR, it allows the transformer to continue operating

for a certain time that is decided by transformer characteristics, customers’ application standard,

etc. Consequently, this group of mechanical signals (MR1~M04, three phase signals) is used in an

application where it needs a time delay from the PCS-974FG receiving the mechanical fault signal

to it initiating a trip command. The wiring schematic is proposed in Figure 3.1-2.

Contact from

Transformer MR

Delay

AUX+ AUX-

RELAY

Internal+Internal-

1

2

Tripping

Annunciation Signal

FDR Signal

Remote Signal

Figure 3.1-2 Trip with Time Delay

Once the normal open contact of transformer MR is closed, a normal open contact 1 of the relay is

closed to conduct the optical coupler. After a configurable time delay, normal open contact 2 is

closed by the special processing circuit to initiate a trip command to open CB and issue several

alarm annunciation signals.

NOTE: When any one phase signal of the mechanical signals MR1~MR4 arrives,

associated normal open contact of binary output relay is closed after a time delay or

Page 27: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-3 Date: 2013-05-17

without time delay to issue a trip command. It will not drop off until the mechanical signal

is gone.

3.1.4 Logic of MR Trip with Time Delay

PCS-974FG provides four MR trip elements with time delay, MR1, MR2, MR3 and MR4. The

protection logical diagram of MR1 is slightly different from the others, and operation logic of phase

A of MR1 signal is shown in Figure 3.1-3.

3.1.4.1 Logic of MR1 protection

&

&

≥1

&

&

[MR1.Op]

≥1

&

&

BI [BI_EnDlyMR]

LINK [Link_EnDlyMR]

SET [MR1.En_FixDly]

BI [BI_PhA_MR01]

SET [MR1.En_OpDly]

SET [MR1.En_MR14CtrlMR1]

BI [BI_PhA_MR14]

[MR1.t_OpDly] 0ms

[MR1.t_FixDly] 0ms

Figure 3.1-3 Logic of MR1

Where:

[BI_EnDlyMR]: the binary input of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.

[Link_EnDlyMR]: the logic link of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.

[MR1.En_FixDly]: the logic setting of enabling MR1 protection to issue a trip command after the

fixed time delay [MR1.t_FixDly].

[MR1.En_OpDly]: the logic setting of enabling MR1 protection to issue a trip command after the

time delay [MR1.t_OpDly].

[MR1.En_MR14CtrlMR1]: the logic setting of enabling binary input of MR14 to control MR1

protection.

[BI_PhA_MR01]: the binary input of MR1 signal from transformer mechanical protection.

[BI_PhA_MR14]: the binary input of MR14 signal from transformer mechanical protection.

[MR1.t_FixDly]: the fixed delay of MR1 for tripping.

[MR1.t_OpDly]: the time delay of MR1 for tripping.

[MR1.Op]: MR1 mechanical protection operating to issued trip command.

MR1 has two kinds of time delay, [MR1.t_FixDly] and [MR1.t_OpDly]. They can be used

separately or in cooperation. There are following three modes of MR1 protection by configuring

Page 28: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-4 Date: 2013-05-17

logic settings.

(1) When [MR1.En_FixDly] is set as “1” and MR1 arrives, after a delay of [MR1.t_FixDly],

PCS-974FG initiates a trip command to CB.

(2) When [MR1.En_OpDly] is set as “1” and [MR1.En _MR14CtrlMR1] is set as “0”, MR1

protection is out of control of MR14 signal and [MR1.t_OpDly] has the same meaning as

[MR1.t_FixDly].

(3) When both [MR1.En_OpDly] and [MR1.En _MR14CtrlMR1] are set as “1”, MR1 protection is

under the control of MR14 signal. As MR1 arrives and hold for [MR1.t_OpDly], if

[BI_PhA_MR14] is still “0”, MR1 protection is blocked by MR10 signal to issue a trip command

to CB. If MR1 signal arrives and hold for [MR1.t_OpDly], now supposing that [BI_PhA_MR14]

is “1”, PCS-974FG initiates a trip command.

In this cooperation way, [MR1.t_FixDly] should be set longer than [MR1.t_OpDly]. Otherwise,

[MR1.t_OpDly] will not actually function.

3.1.4.2 Logic of MR2~MR4

MR2, MR3 and MR4 have same protection logic with independent settings and here phase A of

MR2 is taken as an example to protection logic.

&

[MR2.Op]

SET [MR2.En_FixDly]

[MR2.t_FixDly] 0ms

BI [BI_EnDlyMR]

LINK [Link_EnDlyMR]

BI [BI_PhA_MR02]

&

Figure 3.1-4 Logic diagram of MR2 (or MR3, MR4) protection

Where:

[MR2.En_FixDly]: the logic setting of enabling MR2 protection to issue a trip command after the

delay [MR2.t_FixDly].

[BI_PhA_MR02]: the binary input of MR2 signal from transformer mechanical protection;

[BI_EnDlyMR]: the binary input of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.

[Link_EnDLyMR]: the logic link of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.

[MR2.t_FixDly]: the time delay of MR2 protection for tripping;

[MR2.Op]: MR2 protection operating to issued trip command.

3.2 Pole Disagreement Protection (PD)

With voltage level involved, the switching equipment usually consists of single pole devices that

Page 29: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-5 Date: 2013-05-17

are not mechanically linked, with each pole having an independent operating mechanism. With

such an arrangement, the possibility exists that one pole may not operate coincidentally with the

other poles, thus creating an undesirable imbalance in system voltages or, in case the switching

equipment were called upon to clear a fault, might fail to remove the faulted source from service.

So that if a pole disagreement fault is detected, after a certain delay, PCS-974FG will initiate a trip

command to trip all poles of the switching equipment.

3.2.1 Control Element

PCS-974FG provides three kinds of overcurrent control elements for pole disagreement protection:

phase overcurrent element, residual overcurrent element and negative-sequence overcurrent

element which are configurable by logic settings and are “OR” relation to release pole

disagreement protection.

Ipmax>[62PD.Ip_Set]

or 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]

or I2>[62PD.I2_Set]

Equation 3.2-1

Where:

Ipmax: the maximum value of phase current.

3I0: the calculated residual current.

I2: the negative-sequence current.

[62PD.Ip_Set]: the current setting of phase overcurrent element for pole disagreement protection.

[62PD.3I0_Set]: the current setting of residual overcurrent element for pole disagreement

protection.

[62PD.I2_Set]: the current setting of negative-sequence overcurrent element for pole

disagreement protection,.

The binary input of three-pole tripping from external relay ([BI_ExTCtrlPD2]) is used to control

delay 2 of pole disagreement protection.

3.2.2 Logic

The logical of pole disagreement protection is shown in the following figure.

Page 30: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-6 Date: 2013-05-17

[62PD.Op_t2]

SIG 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]

SET [62PD.En_3I0]

SET [62PD.En_I2]

SIG I2>[62PD.I2_Set]

BI [BI_PD]

SET [62PD.En_t1]

BI [BI_En62PD]

LINK [Link_En62PD]

&

≥1

&

≥1

&

&

&

SIG 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]

SET [62PD.En_3I0]

SET [62PD.En_I2]

BI [BI_PD]

SET [62PD.En_t2]

BI [BI_En62PD]

LINK [Link_En62PD]

&

&

BI [BI_ExTCtrlPD2]

SET [62PD.En_ExTrp_t2]

SIG Ipmax>[62PD.Ip_Set]

SET [62PD.En_Ip_t2]

SIG I2>[62PD.I2_Set]]

≥1

≥1

&

&

&

≥1

≥1

&

[62PD.t2_Op] 0ms

[62PD.t2_Op] 0ms [62PD.Op_t1]

Figure 3.2-1 Logic diagram of pole disagreement protection

Where:

Ipmax, 3I0, I2, [62PD.Ip_Set], [62PD.3I0_Set] and [62PD.I2_Set]: same meanings as those

mentioned in above section.

[62PD.En_3I0]: the logic setting of enabling pole disagreement protection being controlled by

residual overcurrent element.

Page 31: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-7 Date: 2013-05-17

[62PD.En_I2]: the logic setting of enabling pole disagreement protection being controlled by

zero-sequence overcurrent element.

[62PD.En_Ip_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of pole disagreement protection being

controlled by phase overcurrent element.

[62PD.En_t1]: the logic setting of enabling delay 1 of pole disagreement protection.

[62PD.En_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of pole disagreement protection.

[BI_PD]: the binary input of pole disagreement position of circuit breaker.

[BI_En62PD]: the binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection.

[Link_En62PD]: the logic link of enabling pole disagreement protection.

[62PD.En_ExTrp_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of pole disagreement protection being

controlled by binary input of three-pole tripping from external relay.

[BI_ExTCtrlPD2]: the binary input of three-pole tripping from external relay.

[62PD.t1]: the time delay of delay 1 of pole disagreement protection.

[62PD.t2]: the time delay of delay 2 of pole disagreement protection.

[62PD.Op_t1]: the delay 1 of pole disagreement protection operates to issue tripping command.

[62PD.Op_t2]: the delay 2 of pole disagreement protection operates to issue tripping command.

3.3 Breaker Failure Initiation (50BF)

This function is specifically used to detect breaker failure which is that breaker fails to be tripped to

clear fault after it receives tripping command. After breaker failure is detected, contacts of initiating

breaker failure initiation are sent out to external relay which is responsible for issuing tripping

command.

3.3.1 Operation Criteria

Breaker failure initiation in PCS-974FG is initiated by one of three elements: phase overcurrent

element, residual current element or negative sequence current element. Followings are criteria of

those elements:

Ipmax >[50BF.Ip_Set]

3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]

I2 >[50BF.I2_Set]

Equation 3.3-1

Where:

Ipmax: the maximum value of phase current.

3I0: the calculated residual current.

Page 32: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-8 Date: 2013-05-17

I2: the negative-sequence current.

[62PD.Ip_Set]: the current setting of phase overcurrent element breaker failure initiation.

[62PD.3I0_Set]: the current setting of residual overcurrent element for breaker failure initiation.

[62PD.I2_Set]: the current setting of negative-sequence overcurrent element for breaker failure

initiation.

3.3.2 Control Element

It is configurable whether the breaker failure initiation is blocked by any one of following contacts:

pole disagreement position ([BI_PD]), closed state of breaker auxiliary contact ([BI_52a]) or

external tripping signal ( [BI_ExTCtrBFI]).

3.3.3 Logic

PCS-974FG provides two delays for breaker failure initiation, and the corresponding logic diagram

is shown below.

[50BF.Op_t2][50BF.t2_Op] 0ms

BI [BI_ExTCtrlBFI]

≥1

SET [50BF.En_ExTrp_Ctrl]

BI [BI_52a]

≥1

SET [50BF.En_52a_Ctrl]

BI [BI_PD]

≥1

SET [50BF.En_PD_Ctrl]

SIG 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]

SET [50BF.En_3I0]

SET [50BF.En_I2]

SIG Ipmax>[62PD.Ip_Set]

SIG I2>[50BF.I2_Set]]

&

&

≥1

EN [50BF.En]

BI [BI_En50BF]

LINK [Link_En50BF]

&

&

&

&

SET [50BF.En_t2]

&

&

SET [50BF.En_t1]

[50BF.Op_t1][50BF.t1_Op] 0ms

Figure 3.3-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure initiation

Where:

Ipmax, 3I0, I2, [50BF.Ip_Set], [50BF.3I0_Set] and [50BF.I2_Set]: same meanings as those

Page 33: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-9 Date: 2013-05-17

mentioned in above section.

[50BF.En_t1]: the logic setting of enabling delay 1 of breaker failure initiation.

[50BF.En_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of breaker failure initiation.

[50BF.En_ExTrp_Ctrl]: the logic setting of enabling binary input [BI_ExTCtrlBFI] to control breaker

failure initiation.

[BI_ExTCtrlBFI]: the binary input of external tripping contact from other protection equipment.

[50BF.En_PD_Ctrl]: the logic setting of enabling binary input [BI_PD] to control breaker failure

initiation.

[BI_PD]: the binary input of pole disagreement position of circuit breaker.

[50BF.En_52a_Ctrl]: the logic setting of enabling binary input [BI_52a] to control breaker failure

initiation.

[BI_52a]: the binary input of normally open auxiliary contact of circuit breaker.

[50BF.En]: the logic setting of enabling breaker failure initiation.

[50BF.En_3I0]: the logic setting of enabling breaker failure initiation being controlled by residual

overcurrent element.

[50BF.En_I2]: the logic setting of enabling breaker failure initiation being controlled by

negative-sequence overcurrent element.

[BI_En50BF]: the binary input of enabling breaker failure initiation.

[Link_En50BF]: the logic link of enabling breaker failure initiation.

[50BF.t1]: the time delay of delay 1 of breaker failure initiation.

[50BF.t2]: the time delay of delay 2 of breaker failure initiation.

[50BF.Op_t1]: the delay 1 of breaker failure initiation operates to issue tripping command.

[50BF.Op_t2]: the delay 2 of breaker failure initiation operates to issue tripping command.

3.4 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS)

If negative sequence current is greater than 0.1In (In is the secondary rated current.) or residual

current is greater than 0.06In over 10s, the device will issue an alarm message as [AlmL_CTS] on

LCD. For the meantime, LED “ALARM” is lit on and associated normal open contacts of

equipment alarm relay are closed to issue annunciation signal, remote signal and event recording.

This alarm information can also be sent to SCADA by communication port. At this time, the device

can also endure on service.

The LED “ALARM” will be extinguished automatically 10s later after the three-phase current

returns to normal state.

Page 34: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

3 Operation Theory

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-10 Date: 2013-05-17

Page 35: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-a Date: 2013-05-17

4 Supervision

Table of Contents

4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Relay Self-supervision .................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.1 Relay Hardware Supervision .............................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.2 Output Circuit Supervision .................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.3 Setting Checking ................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2.4 Memory Checking ............................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.5 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-2

4.2.6 Fault Detector Element Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.7 Test Mode Supervision ....................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3 Equipment Operation Supervision ................................................................. 4-2

4.3.1 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) ............................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Failure and Abnormality Alarms ..................................................................... 4-3

4.4.1 Hardware Self-supervision Alarms ...................................................................................... 4-3

4.4.2 Equipment Operation Alarms .............................................................................................. 4-7

List of Tables

Table 4.4-1 Equipment self-check alarm list ........................................................................... 4-3

Table 4.4-2 Equipment operation alarm list ............................................................................. 4-7

Page 36: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-b Date: 2013-05-17

Page 37: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-1 Date: 2013-05-17

4.1 Overview

Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a

power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. When

equipment is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the equipment needs to be

checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the

health of the protection system when startup and during normal operation, plays an important role.

The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this

automatic supervision function of the protection system.

In case a fatal fault is detected during automatic supervision, the equipment will be blocked. It

means that relay is out of service. Before you must re-energize the relays or reset CPU module

and MON module to make relay back into service, please find out the cause and inform the

factory.

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED

indication and alarm contact outputs. At the same time event recording will record the failure alarm

which can be viewed in event recording report and be printed.

4.2 Relay Self-supervision

4.2.1 Relay Hardware Supervision

All chips on each module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or have errors. If

any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the corresponding alarm signal

[ProtBrd.Fail_DSP] or [FDBrd.Fail_DSP] is issued with equipment being blocked.

AC current inputs are monitored and if the samples are detected to be wrong or inconsistent, an

alarm [ProtBrd.Fail_Sampel] or [FDBrd.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.

4.2.2 Output Circuit Supervision

State of binary outputs on each BO module at slot BXX(XX is the slot number) is continuously

monitored.

If any abnormality is detected on the module and the output contact for tripping, the corresponding

alarm signal [BXX.Fail_Output] will be issued with equipment being blocked.

If any abnormality is detected on the module and the output contact for signal, the corresponding

alarm signal [BXX.Alm_Output] will be issued without equipment being blocked.

4.2.3 Setting Checking

This relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active

setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are checked to be

unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued, and the

protective device is also blocked.

Page 38: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-2 Date: 2013-05-17

4.2.4 Memory Checking

Data in non-volatile memory, which are not changed after device energized, are always checked

during device normal operation, such as settings, pointers, etc. If these data changed abnormally,

the corresponding alarm [ProtBrd.Memory] or [FDBrd.Memory] will be issued.

4.2.5 Opto-coupler Power Supervision

Positive power supply of opto-coupler on each BI module at slot XX is continuously monitored, and

if a failure or damage on the module is detected, then the alarm signal [BXX.Alm_OptoDC] will be

issued.

4.2.6 Fault Detector Element Supervision

If any fault detector picks up to trigger oscillography function, the corresponding binary input

changing report will be recorded in “IO Events” menu with tripping report [TrigDFR] being issued.

If a fault detector for protection or fault detector calculation keeps picking up for 10s, the

corresponding alarm signal [ProtBrd.Alm_PersistPkp] or [FDBrd.Alm_Pkp] will be issued without

equipment being blocked.

4.2.7 Test Mode Supervision

When protection equipment is in communication test mode the alarm signal [Alm_CommTest] is

issued without blocking equipment.

4.3 Equipment Operation Supervision

4.3.1 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)

The CTS function will be always processed all the time, which includes following two aspects

The CTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure that current

measurement is the actual value of power system. The main purpose of the CTS function is to

ensure the integrity of the CT circuits maintaining the performance of protective equipment.

If negative sequence current is greater than 0.1In (In is the secondary rated current.) or residual

current is greater than 0.06In over 10s, the device will issue an alarm message as [AlmL_CTS] on

LCD. For the meantime, LED “ALARM” is lit on and associated normal open contacts of

equipment alarm relay are closed to issue annunciation signal, remote signal and event recording.

This alarm information can also be sent to SCADA by communication port. At this time, the device

can also endure on service.

The LED “ALARM” will be extinguished automatically 10s later after the three-phase current

returns to normal state.

Page 39: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-3 Date: 2013-05-17

4.4 Failure and Abnormality Alarms

NOTE:Following alarm messages and corresponding LED indicators are fixed in

equipment software. Besides, there are other programmable LED indicators configured

according to user requirement.

4.4.1 Hardware Self-supervision Alarms

Equipment hardware circuits and software working conditions are always monitored by the relay. If

any abnormality occurs, the corresponding alarm message will be issued on the LCD of the

equipment.

When some light failures are detected, part of protection functions probably be disabled and

others can still work. Some server failures of hardware or software will result in the equipment

being blocked and the contacts of equipment failure will operate at same time. During that

condition, the protection relay has to be out of service for maintenance.

NOTE:If an alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault

diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages but not to simply reboot or re-power the

relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform manufacturer for

maintenance.

Table 4.4-1 Equipment self-check alarm list

No. Alarm Message Meaning Description

1 Alm_Device The device is abnormal.

2 Alm_CommTest The device is in the communication test mode.

3 Alm_TimeSyn Time synchronization abnormality alarm.

4 Alm_Version The error is found during checking the version of software

downloaded to the device.

5 Alm_Settings_MON The error is found during MON module checking settings of

device.

6 BI_Maintenance The device is in maintenance state.

7 Alm_BI_SettingGrp The active group set by settings in device and that set by

binary input are not matched

8 BXX.Alm_OptoDC The power supply of BXX binary input module is abnormal.

9 ProtBrd.Alm_PersistPkp The duration of pickup of any fault detector for protection

calculation is in excess of 10s.

10 FDBrd.Alm_PersistPkp The duration of pickup of any fault detector for fault detector

calculation is in excess of 10s.

11 ProtBrd.Alm_PersistBlk The protection logic of protection module keeps being blocked

over 10s.

Page 40: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-4 Date: 2013-05-17

No. Alarm Message Meaning Description

12 FDBrd.Alm_PersistBlk The protection logic of fault detector module keeps being

blocked over 10s.

13 Bxx.Alm_Output Driving circuits of binary output relays for singal on the BXX

module are damaged.

14 Bxx.Alm There is abnormality detected on the BXX module.

When No.1~No.14 messages are issued on the LCD of the relay, the LED “HEALTHY” is steady green and

the protection equipment is not blocked with the LED “ALARM” being lit.

15 Fail_Device The device fails.

16 Fail_Setting_OvRange Setting values are out of range.

17 Fail_BoardConfig Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the

designing drawing of an applied-specific project.

18 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd After configuration file is updated, settings of the file and

settings saved on the device are not matched.

19 ProtBrd.Fail_Settings Error is found during checking settings for protection

calculation.

20 FDBrd.Fail_Settings Error is found during checking settings for fault detector

calculation.

21 ProtBrd.Fail_Memory Error is found during checking the memory data for protection

calculation.

22 FDBrd.Fail_Memory Error is found during checking the memory data for fault

detector calculation.

23 ProtBrd.Fail_Sample Sample values for protection calculation are abnormal.

24 FDBrd.Fail_Sample Sample values for fault detector calculation are abnormal.

25 ProtBrd.Fail_Config Software configuration for protection calculation is found

incorrectly.

26 FDBrd.Fail_Config Software configuration for fault detector calculation is found

incorrectly.

27 ProtBrd.Fail_DSP DSP chip for protection calculation is damaged.

28 FDBrd.Fail_DSP DSP chip for fault detector calculation is damaged.

29 Bx.Fail_Output Driving circuits of binary output relays for tripping on the BXX

module are damaged.

When No.18~No.29 messages are issued on the LCD, the LED “HEALTHY” is extinguished, and the

protection equipment is blocked at the same time, but the LED “ALARM” is not lit.

Handling suggestion:

1. No.1, No.15: The signal is always issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to

the handling suggestion of other specific alarm signals.

2. No.2: No special treatment is needed. Just wait the completion of communication test., or exit

Page 41: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-5 Date: 2013-05-17

the test.

3. No.3: Step1: check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the clock

synchronization source;

Step 2: check whether the wiring connection between the equipment and the clock

synchronization source is correct

Step 3: check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e. [Opt_TimeSyn]) is

set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization, please set the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] as “No

TimeSyn”.

After the abnormality is removed, the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the

corresponding alarm message will disappear and the equipment will restore to normal

operation state.

4. No.4: Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning stage, but it

is needed to download the latest package file (including correct version checksum file)

provided by R&D engineer to make the alarm signal disappear. Then users get the correct

software version. It is not allowed that the alarm signal is issued on the device already has

been put into service. the devices having being put into service so that the alarm signal

disappears

5. No.6: After maintenance is finished, please de-energized the binary input [BI_Maintenance]

and then the alarm will disappear and the equipment restore to normal operation state.

6. No.7: Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of indicating active

group, and make them matched. Then the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the

corresponding alarm message will disappear and the equipment will restore to normal

operation state.

7. No. 8: Step 1: check whether the binary input module is connected to the power supply.

Step 2: check whether the voltage of power supply is in the required range.

After the voltage for binary input module restores to normal range, the “ALARM” LED will be

extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the equipment will

restore to normal operation state.

8. No.9~No.10: Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set

reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then the alarm

message will disappear and the equipment will restore to normal operation state.

NOTE! Tripping out contacts are blocked in 1s after a transformer relay is energized with

“HEALTHY” LED indicator being lit. This situation is decided as a relay fault, and the alarm

signal [ProtBrd.Alm_Pkp] and [FDBrd.Alm_Pkp] will be issued after tripping output contacts

keeps on picking up over10s.

9. No.11~No.12: If [BXX.Alm_OptoDC] alarm message is issued together, please do as the

handleing suggestion for No.8. If the alarm message [ProtBrd.Alm_PersistBlk] or

Page 42: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-6 Date: 2013-05-17

[FDBrd.Alm_PersistBlk] is still issued without the message [BXX.Alm_OptoDC], please check

the hardware of device.

10. No.13, No.29: Please re-insert the corresponding binary output module and re-power the

equipment after the completion of insertion, and the equipment will restore to normal

operation state.

11. No.14: The signal is always issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to the

handling suggestion of other specific alarm signals. If only this alarm is issued, please replace

the module.

12. No.16: Please reset setting values according to the range described in the instruction manual,

then re-power or reboot the equipment and the alarm message will disappear and the

equipment will restore to normal operation state.

13. No.17: Step 1: Go to the menu “Information”->”Board Info”, check the abnormality

information.

Step 2: For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if the board is

used, then check whether the board is installed properly and work normally.

After the abnormality is removed, re-power or reboot the equipment and the equipment will

restore to normal operation state.

14. No.18: Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and go to

the menu “Settings” and select “Confirm Settings” item to confirm settings. Then, the

equipment will restore to normal operation stage.

15. No.19, No.20: Step 1: Check CT ratio settings of each side of transformer to be set in proper

range, and if need, please reset those settings and reboot or re-power the equipment.

Step 2: Check overexcitation settings to be set reasonable, and if need, please reset those

settings and reboot or re-power the equipment.

Step 3: After above two steps, abnormality may disappear. Otherwise, a hardware failure

probably occurs and please inform the manufacture or the agent.

16. No.5, No.21, No.22: Please inform the manufacture or the agent for maintenance.

17. No.23, No.24: Step 1: Please make the equipment out of service.

Step 2: Then check if the analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to those

modules are installed at the position.

Step 3: Re-power the equipment and the equipment will restore to normal operation state.

18. No.25, No.26: Please inform configuration engineers to check and confirm visualization

functions of the device

19. No.27, No.28: Chips are damaged and please inform the manufacturer or the agent to replace

the module.

Page 43: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-7 Date: 2013-05-17

NOTE! If the equipment still cannot restore to normal operation state after suggested

procedures, please inform the manufacture or the agent for maintenance.

4.4.2 Equipment Operation Alarms

During the equipment normal operation, CT circuit and some binary input circuits are always

monitored by the relay. If any abnormality of them occurs or any alarm element operates, the

corresponding alarm message will be issued on the LCD of the equipment without blocking

equipment and “ALARM” LED is lit at the same time.

When this kind of alarm messages are issued, user need to find the abnormality reason, and then

take corresponding measures to eliminate the alarm message to make the equipment return to the

normal operation state.

Table 4.4-2 Equipment operation alarm list

No. Alarm Message Meaning Description

1 AlmL_CTS CT secondary circuit is abnormal.

2 Alm_BI_ExTCtrlBFI Binary input of tripping signal for controlling breaker failure initiation

(i.e. [BI_ExTCtrlBFI]) keeps being energized over 3s.

3 Alm_BI_ExTCtrlPD2 Binary input of tripping signal for controlling delay 2 of pole

disagreement (i.e. [BI_ExTCtrlBFI]) keeps being energized over 3s.

4 Alm_BI_PD Binary input of pole disagreement of circuit breaker. (i.e.

[BI_ExTCtrlBFI]) keeps being energized over 10s.

Handling suggestion:

1. No.1: Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is

eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off automatically and equipment returns to normal operation

state.

2. No.2~No.4 Check the corresponding binary input circuit. (No.2~No.4).

Page 44: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

4 Supervision

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-8 Date: 2013-05-17

Page 45: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

5 Management

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-a Date: 2013-05-17

5 Management

Table of Contents

5.1 General Description......................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-1

5.3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3.2 Event Recording ................................................................................................................. 5-1

5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ....................................................................................... 5-2

5.3.4 Present Recording .............................................................................................................. 5-3

Page 46: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

5 Management

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-b Date: 2013-05-17

Page 47: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

5 Management

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-1 Date: 2013-05-17

5.1 General Description

The relay also provides some auxiliary functions, such as on-line data metering, binary input

status, event and disturbance recording, etc. All these make the relay meet the demands of the

modern power grid requirements.

5.2 Measurement

The equipment performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The

measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or

remote PC.

Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. Calculate the RMS value in each interval and LCD will be

updated every 0.5 second.

5.3 Event & fault Records

5.3.1 Introduction

The protection equipment provides the following recording functions:

Event recording

DFR

Present recording

All the recording information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.

Waveform must be printed or be extracted by using PCS-Explorer software and a waveform

software.

5.3.2 Event Recording

The equipment can store 1024 abnormality alarm reports, 1024 binary input stage changing

reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available

space is exhausted, the oldest report will be automatically overwritten by the latest one

Abnormality alarm reports

An abnormality alarm being detected during relay self-check supervision or an alarm of secondary

circuit abnormality or protection alarm element will also be logged as individual events.

Binary input status changing reports

When binary input status changes, the change information will be displayed on LCD and logged as

binary input change report at the same time.

Page 48: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

5 Management

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-2 Date: 2013-05-17

5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording

5.3.3.1 Application

Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power

network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis

of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.

This information can also be used when planning for new installations.

5.3.3.2 Design

Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform. Disturbance recorder is

triggered by fault detectors. The equipment can store 64 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in

non-volatile memory.

When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip

record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of

cases:

1) Only the fault detector element operates.

2) The fault detector element operates associated with the operation of protective elements.

1. Trip record capacity and information

The equipment can store 64 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs

when 64 faults have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one..

The following items are recorded for one fault:

1) Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD

screen.

2) Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault

detector picks up. Relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping

signal after fault detector picks up.

3) Faulty phase

The faulty phase detected by the operating element is showed in the record report.

4) Trip mode

This shows the protection element that issues the tripping command. If no protection operates to

trip but only equipment fault detector picks up, fault report will record the title of fault detector.

2. Fault waveform record capacity and information

MON module of the relay can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory.

If a new fault occurs, when 64 fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be

Page 49: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

5 Management

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-3 Date: 2013-05-17

overwritten by the latest one.

Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original

current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.

Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform and most 250 cycles can be recorded.

5.3.4 Present Recording

Present recording is used to record a piece of waveform of present operation equipment which

can be trigger manually on LCD of equipment or remotely through PCS-Explorer software.

Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.

Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be

recorded.

Page 50: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

5 Management

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-4 Date: 2013-05-17

Page 51: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-a Date: 2013-05-17

6 Hardware Description

Table of Contents

6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ................................................................ 6-4

6.2.1 Plug-in Module Arrangement .............................................................................................. 6-4

6.2.2 PWR Module (Power Supply) ............................................................................................. 6-5

6.2.3 MON Module (Management) .............................................................................................. 6-7

6.2.4 DSP Module ..................................................................................................................... 6-10

6.2.5 BI Module (Binary Input) ................................................................................................... 6-11

6.2.6 BO Module (Binary Output) .............................................................................................. 6-14

6.2.7 MR IO Modules (MR Input and Output) ............................................................................ 6-18

6.2.8 RLY Output Module (Relay Output ) ................................................................................. 6-41

6.2.9 AC AI Module (AC Analog Input) ....................................................................................... 6-44

6.2.10 HMI Module .................................................................................................................... 6-48

6.3 Scheme Diagram of Input and Output of MR .............................................. 6-48

6.4 Output Signals ............................................................................................... 6-52

List of Figures

Figure 6.1-1 Hardware diagram ................................................................................................ 6-1

Figure 6.1-2 Front view of PCS-974 ....................................................................................... 6-3

Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of PCS-974 ............................................................................... 6-4

Figure 6.2-1 Rear view of fixed module position of 4U equipment ....................................... 6-5

Figure 6.2-2 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301 .......................................... 6-6

Figure 6.2-3 Rear view of MON modules ................................................................................. 6-7

Figure 6.2-4 Wiring of communication interface ................................................................... 6-10

Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules ................................................................................ 6-11

Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of tripping output module .......................................................... 6-15

Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of signal output module ............................................................. 6-17

Page 52: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-b Date: 2013-05-17

Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of MR input and output module 1 .............................................. 6-19

Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of MR input and output module 2 .............................................. 6-20

Figure 6.2-10 Pin definition of MR input and output module 3 ............................................ 6-22

Figure 6.2-11 Pin definition of MR input and output module 4 ............................................ 6-23

Figure 6.2-12 Pin definition of MR input and output module 5 ............................................ 6-25

Figure 6.2-13 Pin definition of MR input and output module 6 ............................................ 6-26

Figure 6.2-14 Pin definition of MR input and output module 7 ............................................ 6-28

Figure 6.2-15 Pin definition of MR input and output module 8 ............................................ 6-29

Figure 6.2-16 Pin definition of MR input and output module 9 ............................................ 6-31

Figure 6.2-17 Pin definition of MR input and output module 10 .......................................... 6-32

Figure 6.2-18 Pin definition of MR input and output module 11 .......................................... 6-34

Figure 6.2-19 Pin definition of MR input and output module 12 .......................................... 6-35

Figure 6.2-20 Pin definition of MR input and output module 13 .......................................... 6-37

Figure 6.2-21 Pin definition of MR input and output module 14 .......................................... 6-38

Figure 6.2-22 Pin definition of MR input and output module 15 .......................................... 6-40

Figure 6.2-23 Pin definition of relay output module 1 .......................................................... 6-42

Figure 6.2-24 Pin definition of relay output module 1 .......................................................... 6-43

Figure 6.2-25 Pin definition of AC analog output module .................................................... 6-45

Figure 6.3-1 MR phase A input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG ................... 6-49

Figure 6.3-2 MR phase B input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG ................... 6-50

Figure 6.3-3 MR phase C input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG ................... 6-51

Figure 6.3-4 MR tripping output contacts association diagram of PCS-974FG ............... 6-52

List of Tables

Table 6.1-1 PCS-974 module configuration ............................................................................. 6-2

Page 53: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-1 Date: 2013-05-17

6.1 Overview

Conventional CT/VT

Exte

rna

l

Bin

ary

In

pu

t

+E

Pickup

Relay

Protection

Calculation

DSP

A/D

LCD

Fault

Detector

DSP

A/D

CPU

ECVT

ECVT

Power

SupplyUaux

Keypad

LED

GPS

PRINT

RJ45

ETHERNET

Ou

tpu

t Re

lay

Figure 6.1-1 Hardware diagram

The PCS-974 adopts 64-bit microchip processor CPU produced by FREESCALE as control core

for logic calculation and management function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal

processor DSP to be in charge of all the protection calculation. 24 points are sampled in every

cycle and parallel processing of sampled data can be realized in each sampling interval to ensure

ultra-high reliability and safety of protection equipment.

The working process of the device is as follows: firstly, the current and voltage is converted into

small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after being filtered and converted by AD for

protection calculation and fault detector respectively. When DSP module completes all the

protection calculation, the result will be sent to 64-bit CPU on MON module to be recorded. DSP

module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module completes

SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between

protection and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. The work process of fault

detector DSP module is similar to that of protection DSP module, and the only difference is, when

fault detector DSP module decides a fault detector picks up, only positive power supply of output

relay is switched on.

The PCS-974 is comprised of intelligent modules, except that few particular modules’ position

cannot be changed in the whole device (please refer to Figure 6.2-1 for details), the others like AI

(analog input) module such as AC current, AC voltage, DC current, and etc., and IO (input and

output) module such as binary input, tripping output, signal output, and etc can be flexibly

configured according to the remained slot positions.

Page 54: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-2 Date: 2013-05-17

Table 6.1-1 PCS-974 module configuration

No. Module description

1 Management module (MON module)

2 DSP module (DSP module 1

3 AC analog input module ( AC AI module )

4 Binary input module (BI module)

5 Signal output module (BO signal module )

6 Tripping output module (BO tripping module)

7 MR Input and output module (IO moudule)

8 Relay output module (RLY module)

9 Power supply module (PWR module)

10 Human machine interface module (HMI module)

11 NET-DSP module (optional)

MON module provides functions like management function, completed event record, setting

management, and etc.

DSP modules are totally the same, to carry out filtering, sampling and protection calculation

and fault detector calculation respectively.

AC AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals with current

transformers and voltage transformers respectively.

BI module provides binary input, and the binary is inputted via

24V/48V/110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler (configurable).

BO signal module provides all kinds of signal output contact, including annunciation signal,

remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal and etc.

BO trip module provides all tripping output contacts.

Mechanical IO module provides binary inputs of mechanical signals and all kinds of signal

output contact, including annunciation signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal for

mechanical protection.

Relay ouput module is applied for extention of tripping outputs by repeating tripping

command signal.

PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into different DC voltage levels for various

modules of the equipment

HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and test serial ports, and it is

convenient for user to perform human-machine interaction with equipment.

NET-DSP module (optional) is applied for realization of GOOSE level interlocking, and for

connection to ECVT with supporting IEC 61850-9-1 and IEC 61850-9-2 protocols.

Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-974 respectively. Programmable LED

indicators (No.4-No.20) can be defined by users trough PCS-Explorer software.

Page 55: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-3 Date: 2013-05-17

PCS-974

TRANSFORMER AUXILIARY RELAY

GR

P

ENT

ES

C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

HEALTHY

ALARM

TRIP

Figure 6.1-2 Front view of PCS-974

Page 56: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-4 Date: 2013-05-17

NR1401

DANGER

NR1102M NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1533 NR1301

11

1

9

3

10

8

7

6

4

5

2

12

BO_COM1

BO_ALM

OPTO+

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

BO_COM2

OPTO-

PWR+

PWR-

GND

BO_FAIL

5V ALM

BO_ALM BO_FAIL

OK

ON

OFF

NR1161 NR1548 NR1533 NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1533

NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1544NR1544NR1502 NR1547 NR1533NR1533

Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of PCS-974

6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition

Equipment consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, Analog input module,

opto-coupler input module, tripping output module, signal output module, input and output signal

for mechanical relay. The definition and application of each module and its terminal is introduced

as follows:

6.2.1 Plug-in Module Arrangement

The module arrangement of PCS-974FG from rear view is shown in the following view

Page 57: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-5 Date: 2013-05-17

MO

N m

od

ule

DS

P m

od

ule

AC

AI m

od

ule

MR

IO

mo

du

le 2

MR

IO

mo

du

le 3

MR

IO

mo

du

le 4

MR

IO

mo

du

le 5

Slot No.01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 P1

NR1301NR1533NR1102 NR1161 NR1533 NR1533NR1401 NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 6

MR

IO

mo

du

le 7

11 12

NR1533NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 8

13

NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 9

14

NR1533

PW

R m

od

ule

BI m

od

ule

BO

mo

du

le 2

RL

Y o

utp

ut m

od

ule

1

Slot No.16 17 18 19 20 21 22

NR1502 NR1157 NR1544

RL

Y o

utp

ut m

od

ule

223 24

NR1544

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

1

25

NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

2

26

NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

3

27

NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

4

28

NR1533

29 31 32

NR1548 NR1533

BO

mo

du

le 1

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

0

15

NR1533

MR

IO

mo

du

le 1

5

NR1533

33

Figure 6.2-1 Rear view of fixed module position of 4U equipment

6.2.2 PWR Module (Power Supply)

The power supply module (NR1301) is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation

between input and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in

Chapter “Technical Data”. The standardized output voltages are +3.3V, +5V, ±12V and +24V DC.

The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.

The +3.3V DC output provides power supply for the microchip processors, and the +5V DC output

provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device.

The ±12V DC output provides power supply for A/D conversion circuits in this device, and the

+24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device.

The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker

must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is

in cold reserve.

A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module at slot 01. The pin definition of

the connector is described as below.

Page 58: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-6 Date: 2013-05-17

NR1301

11

1

9

3

10

8

7

6

4

5

2

12

BO_COM1

OPTO+

PWR+

PWR-

GND

5V OK ALM

BO_ALM

BO_FAIL

BO_COM2

BO_FAIL

OPTO-

BO_ALM

BO_ALM

BO_FAIL

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM0102

0103

0101

0105

0106

0104BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

Figure 6.2-2 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301

Pin No. Symbol Description

0101 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1

0102 BO_FAIL Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)

0103 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)

0104 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2

0105 BO_FAIL Device failure output 2 (0104-0105, NC)

0106 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 2 (0104-0106, NO)

0107 OPTO+ Positive pole of power supply for Low-voltage BI module (24V)

0108 OPTO- Negative pole of power supply for Low-voltage BI module (24V)

0109 Not used

0110 PWR+ Positive pole of power supply for the device (250/220V/125/110V)

0111 PWR- Negative pole of power supply for the device (250/220V/125/110V)

0112 GND Grounded connection of the device

NOTE! The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 220Vdc and

110Vdc, but the power supply in other DC voltage level or power supply of AC voltage

need to be specially ordered, and check if the rated voltage of power supply module is

the same as the voltage of external control power supply before equipment being put into

Page 59: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-7 Date: 2013-05-17

service.

NOTE! The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for

grounding of equipment. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the

connected to the earth copper bar of panel via dedicated grounding wire.

NOTE! Effective grounding is the most important measure for equipment to prevent

EMI, so effective grounding must be ensured before the device is put into operation.

6.2.3 MON Module (Management)

The terminals of MON module (NR1102) and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.

The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,

Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete

device, human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.

The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It

communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT

Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time

synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.

NR1102A

ETHERNET

NR1102C

ETHERNET

NR1102B

ETHERNET

NR1102M

ETHERNET

NR1102J

ETHERNET

TX

RX

TX

RX

NR1102I

ETHERNET

TX

RX

TX

RX

NR1101E

ETHERNET

Figure 6.2-3 Rear view of MON modules

Module

ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

Page 60: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-8 Date: 2013-05-17

Module

ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

NR1102A 64M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

RS-485

0201 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

0202 SYN-

0203 SGND

0204

RS-232

0205 RTS

To printer 0206 TXD

0207 SGND

NR1102B 64M DDR

4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

RS-485

0201 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

0202 SYN-

0203 SGND

0204

RS-232

0205 RTS

To printer 0206 TXD

0207 SGND

NR1102C 128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

RS-485

0201 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

0202 SYN-

0203 SGND

0204

RS-232

0205 RTS

To printer 0206 TXD

0207 SGND

NR1102M 256M DDR

4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

RS-485

0201 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

0202 SYN-

0203 SGND

0204

RS-232

0205 RTS

To printer 0206 TXD

0207 SGND

NR1102J 256M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST

RS-485

0201 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

Twisted pair wire

0202 SYN-

0203 SGND

0204

RS-232

0205 RTS

To printer 0206 TXD

0207 SGND

Page 61: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-9 Date: 2013-05-17

Module

ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

NR1102I 128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST

RS-485

0201 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

Twisted pair wire

0202 SYN-

0203 SGND

0204

RS-232

0205 RTS

To printer 0206 TXD

0207 SGND

NR1101E 128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA

Twisted pair wire

RS-485

0201 A

To SCADA 0202 B

0203 SGND

0204

RS-485

0205 A

To SCADA 0206 B

0207 SGND

0208

RS-485

0209 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

0210 SYN-

0211 SGND

0212

RS-232

0213 RTS

To printer 0214 TXD

0215 SGND

0216

The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.2-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two

pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to

connect the “+” and “–” terminals of differential signal; the other pair of twisted pairs are used to

connect the signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices

connected with the bus to the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the

communication ports; the blank terminal does not need to be connected.

Page 62: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-10 Date: 2013-05-17

01

02

03

05

06

07SGND

RTS

TXD

SYN+

SYN-

SGND

04

01

02

03

A

B

SGND

04

Twisted pair wire

Twisted pair wire

Twisted pair wire

To

the

scre

en

of o

the

r co

axia

l

ca

ble

with

sin

gle

po

int e

arth

ing

CO

MC

LO

CK

SY

NP

RIN

T

Figure 6.2-4 Wiring of communication interface

6.2.4 DSP Module

The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit

high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions

of this module include analog data acquisition, sample data exchanging with the opposite side,

calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.

When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data

acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the

real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre

interface.

Page 63: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-11 Date: 2013-05-17

NR1161A NR1161B NR1161C

TX

RX

RX

Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules

Module ID Description

NR1161A 8 analog sampling channels, applied for conventional CT/VT.

NR1161B 12 analog sampling channels, applied for conventional CT/VT.

NR1161C 12 analog sampling channels and 3 ST multi-mode optic fiber ports (1 prot for sending

and 2 ports for receiving, supporting IEC 60044-8), applied for ECVT.

6.2.5 BI Module (Binary Input)

There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR1502Aand NR1502D. The input voltage can be

selected to be 24V/48V (NR1502A) or 110V/220V/125V/250V (NR1502D). This module provides

the monitoring circuit of opto-coupler power supply.

All binary inputs share one common negative power input, and can be configurable. The pin

definition of the connector is described as below.

BI module is with a 30-pin connector for 25 binary inputs shown in the following figure.

Page 64: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-12 Date: 2013-05-17

1601

1603

1605

1607

1609

1611

1613

1615

1617

1619

1621

1623

1625

1627

1629

1602

1604

1606

1608

1610

1612

1614

1616

1618

1620

1622

1624

1626

1628

1630

BI_01

BI_03

BI_02

BI_04

NR1502

Opto+

BI_12

BI_05BI_06

BI_08 BI_07

BI_09BI_10

Opto-

BI_11

BI_14 BI_13

BI_15BI_16

BI_17BI_18

BI_19BI_20

BI_21BI_22

BI_23BI_24

BI_25

NR1502

Figure 6.2-4 Pin definition of BI module (NR1503)

The pin definition of NR 1502 is shown as follows respectively.

Pin No. Original

Symbol

Defined

Symbol Description

1601 BI_01 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse.

1602 BI_02 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing.

1603 BI_03 BI_Maintenance Binary input of indicating the protection device is under maintenance

state.

1604 BI_04 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.

1605 BI_05 BI_En62PD Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection.

1606 BI_06 BI_En50BF Binary input of enabling breaker failure initiation.

1607 BI_07 BI_EnDlyMR Binary input of enabling MR protection with time delay.

1608 BI_08 BI_EnRmtCtrl Binary input of enabling remote control function.

1609 BI_09 Configurable binary input 09.

1610 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10.

1611 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11.

1612 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12.

1613 Opto+ Positive pole of binary input.

1614 Not used.

1615 Opto- Negative pole of binary input.

1616 Not used

Page 65: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-13 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Original

Symbol

Defined

Symbol Description

1617 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13.

1618 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14.

1619 BI_15 Configurable binary input 15.

1620 BI_16 Configurable binary input 16.

1621 BI_17 Configurable binary input 17.

1622 BI_18 Configurable binary input 18.

1623 BI_19 Configurable binary input 19.

1624 BI_20 Configurable binary input 20.

1625 BI_21 Configurable binary input 21.

1626 BI_22 BI_ExTCtrlPD2 Binary input of tripping signal for controlling delay 2 of pole

disagreement.

1627 BI_23 BI_ExTCtrlBFI Binary input of tripping signal for controlling breaker failure initiation.

1628 BI_24 BI_52a Binary input of auxiliary NO contact of circuit breaker.

1629 BI_25 BI_PD Binary input of pole disagreement of circuit breaker.

1630 Not used.

1. Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]

It is used to receive clock synchronism signal from GPS or other device, the binary input

[BI_Pulse_GPS] will change from “0” to “1” once GPS is received. When setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is

select as “PPM(DIN) “ , the device receives pulse per minute (PMS) via the binary input

[BI_Pulse_GPS].,.

2. Binary input: [BI_Print]

It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual

printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.

If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed

automatically as soon as it is formed.

3. Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]

It is used to block communication export when the BI is energized. During equipment maintenance

or testing, the BI is then energized not to send reports via communication port, local display and

printing still work as usual. The BI should be de-energized when the equipment is restored back to

normal.

4. Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]

It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button

on the panel.

NOTE! The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V,

which must be specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated

Page 66: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-14 Date: 2013-05-17

voltage of BI module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.

The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting

IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.

1) Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message

a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.

b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent

change “1”.

c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit

breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.

d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client

discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it

correspondingly. If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message

will not be displayed on real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture

is refreshed so as to ensure that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The

maintenance message will be stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.

2) Processing mechanism for GOOSE message

a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the

protection device changes “1”.

b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the

GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e

[BI_Maintenance]), the message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.

3) Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message

a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling

data in the SV message sent change “1”.

b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling

data in the SV message received by it is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be

disabled, but under maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display

the magnitude of sampling data.

c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module

configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices

and dual merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in

maintenance state will not affect the normal operation of the other.

6.2.6 BO Module (Binary Output)

6.2.6.1 Tripping Output Module (NR1547A)

NR1547A is a standard binary output module, which can provide 15 tripping output contacts and

output contacts can be controlled separately by positive power supply of fault detector. The

Page 67: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-15 Date: 2013-05-17

contacts provide by NR1547A are all normally open (NO) contacts.

A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is

described as below.

1701

1702

1703

1704

1705

1706

1707

1708

1709

1710

1711

1712

1713

1714

BO_Trp_1

NR1547

1715

1716

1717

1718

1719

1720

1721

1722

BO_Trp_2

BO_Trp_3

BO_Trp_4

BO_Trp_5

BO_Trp_6

BO_Trp_7

BO_Trp_8

BO_Trp_9

BO_Trp_10

BO_Trp_11

BO_Trp_11702

1701

BO_Trp_21704

1703

BO_Trp_31706

1705

BO_Trp_41708

1707

BO_Trp_51710

1709

BO_Trp_61712

1711

BO_Trp_71714

1713

BO_Trp_81716

1715

BO_Trp_91718

1717

BO_Trp_101720

1719

BO_Trp_111722

1721

NR1547

1723

1724

1725

1726

1727

1728

1729

1730

BO_Trp_12

BO_Trp_13

BO_Trp_14

BO_Trp_15

BO_Trp_121724

1723

BO_Trp_131726

1725

BO_Trp_141728

1727

BO_Trp_151730

1729

Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of tripping output module

The pin definition of the tripping output module at slot 17 is shown as follows.

Pin No. Original

Symbol

New-defined

Symbol Description

1701 BO_Trp_1 BO_Trp_62PDt1_1

The NO contact 1 of tripping output of pole disagreement

protection delay 1. 1702

1703 BO_Trp_2 BO_Trp_62PDt1_2

The NO contact 2 of tripping output of pole disagreement

protection delay 1. 1704

1705 BO_Trp_3 BO_Trp_62PDt2_1

The NO contact 1 of tripping output of pole disagreement

protection delay 2. 1706

1707 BO_Trp_4 BO_Trp_62PDt2_2

The NO contact 2 of tripping output of pole disagreement

protection delay 2. 1708

1709 BO_Trp_5 BO_Trp_50BFt1_1

The NO contact 1 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation

delay 1. 1710

1711 BO_Trp_6 BO_Trp_50BFt1_2 The NO contact 2 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation

Page 68: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-16 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Original

Symbol

New-defined

Symbol Description

1712 delay 1.

1713 BO_Trp_7 BO_Trp_50BFt2_1

The NO contact 1 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation

delay 2. 1714

1715 BO_Trp_8 BO_Trp_50BFt2_2

The NO contact 2 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation

delay 2. 1716

1717 BO_Trp_9 BO_Trp_DlyMR1

The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical

protection of MR1. 1718

1719 BO_Trp_10 BO_Trp_DlyMR2

The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical

protection of MR2. 1720

1721 BO_Trp_11 BO_Trp_DlyMR3

The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical

protection of MR3. 1722

1723 BO_Trp_12 BO_Trp_DlyMR4

The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical

protection of MR4. 1724

1725 BO_Trp_13 Not used

1726

1727 BO_Trp_14 Not used

1728

1729 BO_Trp_15 Not used

1730

6.2.6.2 Signal Output Module (NR1548B)

The NR1548B module is a standard binary output module for signal, which can provide 15 signal

output contacts without control by fault detector. Among those contacts, contacts [BO_Signal_n]

(n=1,2,…,7, 10, 13, 14, 15) are normally open (NO) contacts and [BO_Signal_11] and

[BO_Siganl_12] are normally closed (NC) contacts. [BO_Signal_x] (x=1, 2, …12) are reserved,

and the last three contact [BO_Prot_x] (x=1, 2, 3) are signal contacts indicating protection

operation. Besides, [BO_Prot_3] is a magnetic latched NO contact defined as protection tripping

signal fixedly.

A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is

described as below.

Page 69: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-17 Date: 2013-05-17

0501

0502

0503

0504

0505

0506

0507

0508

0509

0510

0511

0512

0513

0514

BO_Signal_1

NR1548

0515

0516

0517

0518

0519

0520

0521

0522

BO_Signal_2

BO_Signal_3

BO_Signal_4

BO_Signal_5

BO_Signal_6

BO_Signal_7

BO_Signal_8

BO_Signal_9

BO_Signal_10

BO_Signal_11

BO_Signal_10502

0501

BO_Signal_20504

0503

BO_Signal_30506

0505

BO_Signal_40508

0507

BO_Signal_50510

0509

BO_Signal_60512

0511

BO_Signal_70514

0513

BO_Signal_80516

0515

BO_Signal_90518

0517

BO_Signal_100520

0519

BO_Signal_110522

0521

NR1548

0523

0524

0525

0526

0527

0528

0529

0530

BO_Signal_12

BO_Prot_1

BO_Prot_2

BO_Signal_120524

0523

BO_Prot_10526

0525

BO_Prot_20528

0527

BO_Prot_30530

0529BO_Prot_3

Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of signal output module

NOTE! If more magnetic latched contacts or normally closed (NC) contacts are required,

please specify when placing order.

The pin definition of the signal output module at slot 05 is shown as follows.

Pin No. Original

Symbol

New-defined

Symbol Description

0501 BO_Signal_1 BO_50BF_1 The NO contact 1 of signal output of breaker failure initiation.

0502

0503 BO_ Signal_2 BO_50BF_2 The NO contact 2 of signal output of breaker failure initiation.

0504

0505 BO_ Signal_3 Not used

0506

0507 BO_ Signal_4 Not used

0508

0509 BO_ Signal_5 Not used

0510

0511 BO_ Signal_6 Not used

0512

Page 70: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-18 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Original

Symbol

New-defined

Symbol Description

0513 BO_ Signal_7 Not used

0514

0515 BO_ Signal_8 Not used

0516

0517 BO_ Signal_9 BO_50BF_3 The NO contact 3 of signal output of breaker failure initiation.

0518

0519 BO_ Signal_10 BO_RstTarg The NO contact of resetting signals.

0520

0521 BO_ Signal_11 Not used

0522

0523 BO_ Signal_12 Not used

0524

0525 BO_ Signal_13 BO_Prot_1 The NO contact 1 for indicating protection operation.

0526

0527 BO_ Signal_14 BO_Prot_2 The NO contact 2 for indicating protection operation.

0528

0529 BO_ Signal_15 BO_Prot_3

The NO contact 3 (magnetic latched) for indicating protection

operation. 0530

6.2.7 MR IO Modules (MR Input and Output)

Fifteen MR input and output modules (IO module) for mechanical protection are equipped at slot

06~15 and slot 25-29 respectively.

NR1533A (220/250Vdc) and NR1533B(110/125Vdc) are input and output modules (IO module) for

mechanical protection, and this module is used to output various signals, issue trip commands and

accept reset command.

6.2.7.1 IO Module 1 at Slot 06 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 1 at slot 06 position.

Page 71: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-19 Date: 2013-05-17

0607

0605

0603

0601 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhA_MR01Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhA_MR02

BI_PhA_MR03

0606

0604

0602 BO_PhA_MR01_1

BO_PhA_MR02_1

BO_PhA_MR03_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

0625Module Power Input

0629

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhA_MR04_10608

0609 BI_PhA_MR04

Common10610

0615

0613 BO_PhA_MR02_2

BO_PhA_MR03_2

BO_PhA_MR04_20617

Common20619

0611 BO_PhA_MR01_2

0616

0614 BO_PhA_MR02_3

BO_PhA_MR03_3

BO_PhA_MR04_30618

Common30620

0612 BO_PhA_MR01_3

NR1533

0626

0624 BO_PhA_MR02_4

BO_PhA_MR03_4

BO_PhA_MR04_40628

Common40630

0622 BO_PhA_MR01_4

Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of MR input and output module 1

Pin No. Symbol Description

0601 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

0603 BI_PhA_MR01 Phase A input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.

0605 BI_PhA_MR02 Phase A input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.

0607 BI_PhA_MR03 Phase A input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.

0609 BI_PhA_MR04 Phase A input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

0610, 0602 BO_PhA_MR01_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.

0610, 0604 BO_PhA_MR02_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.

0610, 0606 BO_PhA_MR03_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.

0610, 0608 BO_PhA_MR04_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

0619, 0611 BO_PhA_MR01_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.

0619, 0613 BO_PhA_MR02_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.

0619, 0615 BO_PhA_MR03_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.

0619, 0617 BO_PhA_MR04_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.

Page 72: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-20 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

0620, 0612 BO_PhA_MR01_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.

0620, 0614 BO_PhA_MR02_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.

0620, 0616 BO_PhA_MR03_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.

0620, 0618 BO_PhA _MR04_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

0630, 0622 BO_PhA_MR01_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.

0630, 0624 BO_PhA_MR02_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.

0630, 0626 BO_PhA_MR03_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.

0630, 0628 BO_PhA_MR04_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.

Power supply input of module

0625 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

0629 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.2 IO Module 2 at Slot 07 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 2 at slot 07 position.

0707

0705

0703

0701 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhA_MR05Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhA_MR06

BI_PhA_MR07

0706

0704

0702 BO_PhA_MR05_1

BO_PhA_MR06_1

BO_PhA_MR07_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

0725Module Power Input

0729

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhA_MR08_10708

0709 BI_PhA_MR08

Common10710

0715

0713 BO_PhA_MR06_2

BO_PhA_MR07_2

BO_PhA_MR08_20717

Common20719

0711 BO_PhA_MR05_2

0716

0714 BO_PhA_MR06_3

BO_PhA_MR07_3

BO_PhA_MR08_30718

Common30720

0712 BO_PhA_MR05_3

NR1533

0726

0724 BO_PhA_MR06_4

BO_PhA_MR07_4

BO_PhA_MR08_40728

Common40730

0722 BO_PhA_MR05_4

Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of MR input and output module 2

Page 73: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-21 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

0701 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

0703 BI_PhA_MR05 Phase A input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.

0705 BI_PhA_MR06 Phase A input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.

0707 BI_PhA_MR07 Phase A input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.

0709 BI_PhA_MR08 Phase A input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

0710, 0702 BO_PhA_MR05_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.

0710, 0704 BO_PhA_MR06_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.

0710, 0706 BO_PhA_MR07_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.

0710, 0708 BO_PhA_MR08_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

0719, 0711 BO_PhA_MR05_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.

0719, 0713 BO_PhA_MR06_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.

0719, 0715 BO_PhA_MR07_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.

0719, 0717 BO_PhA_MR08_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

0720, 0712 BO_PhA_MR05_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.

0720, 0714 BO_PhA_MR06_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.

0720, 0716 BO_PhA_MR07_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.

0720, 0718 BO_PhA_MR08_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

0730, 0722 BO_PhA_MR05_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.

0730, 0724 BO_PhA_MR06_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.

0730, 0726 BO_PhA_MR07_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.

0730, 0728 BO_PhA_MR08_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.

Power supply input of module

0725 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

0729 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.3 IO Module 3 at Slot 08 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 3 at slot 08 position.

Page 74: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-22 Date: 2013-05-17

0807

0805

0803

0801 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhA_MR09Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

MBI_PhA_MR10

MBI_PhA_MR11

0806

0804

0802 BO_PhA_MR09_1

BO_PhA_MR10_1

BO_PhA_MR11_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

0825Module Power Input

0829

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhA_MR12_10808

0809 MBI_PhA_MR12

Common10810

0815

0813 BO_PhA_MR10_2

BO_PhA_MR11_2

BO_PhA_MR12_20817

Common20819

0811 BO_PhA_MR09_2

0816

0814 BO_PhA_MR10_3

BO_PhA_MR11_3

BO_PhA_MR12_30818

Common30820

0812 BO_PhA_MR09_3

NR1533

0826

0824 BO_PhA_MR10_4

BO_PhA_MR11_4

BO_PhA_MR12_40828

Common40830

0822 BO_PhA_MR09_4

Figure 6.2-10 Pin definition of MR input and output module 3

Pin No. Symbol Description

0801 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

0803 BI_PhA_MR09 Phase A input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.

0805 BI_PhA_MR10 Phase A input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.

0807 BI_PhA_MR11 Phase A input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.

0809 BI_PhA_MR12 Phase A input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

0810, 0802 BO_PhA_MR09_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.

0810, 0804 BO_PhA_MR10_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.

0810, 0806 BO_PhA_MR11_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.

0810, 0808 BO_PhA_MR12_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

0819, 0811 BO_PhA_MR09_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.

0819, 0813 BO_PhA_MR10_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.

0819, 0815 BO_PhA_MR11_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.

0819, 0817 BO_PhA_MR12_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.

Page 75: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-23 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

0820, 0812 BO_PhA_MR09_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.

0820, 0814 BO_PhA_MR10_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.

0820, 0816 BO_PhA_MR11_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.

0820, 0818 BO_PhA_MR12_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

0830, 0822 BO_PhA_MR09_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.

0830, 0824 BO_PhA_MR10_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.

0830, 0826 BO_PhA_MR11_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.

0830, 0828 BO_PhA_MR12_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.

Power supply input of module

0825 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

0829 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.4 IO Module 4 at Slot 09 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 4 at slot 09 position.

0907

0905

0903

0901 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhA_MR13Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhA_MR14

BI_PhA_MR15

0906

0904

0902 BO_PhA_MR13_1

BO_PhA_MR14_1

BO_PhA_MR15_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

0925Module Power Input

0929

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhA_MR16_10908

0909 BI_PhA_MR16

Common10910

0915

0913 BO_PhA_MR14_2

BO_PhA_MR15_2

BO_PhA_MR16_20917

Common20919

0911 BO_PhA_MR13_2

0916

0914 BO_PhA_MR14_3

BO_PhA_MR15_3

BO_PhA_MR16_30918

Common30920

0912 BO_PhA_MR13_3

NR1533

0926

0924 BO_PhA_MR14_4

BO_PhA_MR15_4

BO_PhA_MR16_40928

Common40930

0922 BO_PhA_MR13_4

Figure 6.2-11 Pin definition of MR input and output module 4

Page 76: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-24 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

0901 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

0903 BI_PhA_MR13 Phase A input signal of MR13 mechanical relay.

0905 BI_PhA_MR14 Phase A input signal of MR14 mechanical relay.

0907 BI_PhA_MR15 Phase A input signal of MR15 mechanical relay.

0909 BI_PhA_MR16 Phase A input signal of MR16 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

0910, 0902 BO_PhA_MR13_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.

0910, 0904 BO_PhA_MR14_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.

0910, 0906 BO_PhA_MR15_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.

0910, 0908 BO_PhA_MR16_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

0919, 0911 BO_PhA_MR13_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.

0919, 0913 BO_PhA_MR14_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.

0919, 0915 BO_PhA_MR15_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.

0919, 0917 BO_PhA_MR16_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

0920, 0912 BO_PhA _MR13_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.

0920, 0914 BO_PhA _MR14_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.

0920, 0916 BO_PhA _MR15_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.

0920, 0918 BO_PhA _MR16_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

0930, 0922 BO_PhA_MR13_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.

0930, 0924 BO_PhA_MR14_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.

0930, 0926 BO_PhA_MR15_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.

0930, 0928 BO_PhA_MR16_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.

Power supply input of module

0925 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

0929 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.5 IO Module 5 at Slot 10 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 5 at slot 10 position.

Page 77: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-25 Date: 2013-05-17

1007

1005

1003

1001 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhA_MR17Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhA_MR18

BI_PhA_MR19

1006

1004

1002 BO_PhA_MR17_1

BO_PhA_MR18_1

BO_PhA_MR19_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

1025Module Power Input

1029

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhA_MR20_11008

1009 BI_PhA_MR20

Common11010

1015

1013 BO_PhA_MR18_2

BO_PhA_MR19_2

BO_PhA_MR20_21017

Common21019

1011 BO_PhA_MR17_2

1016

1014 BO_PhA_MR18_3

BO_PhA_MR19_3

BO_PhA_MR20_31018

Common31020

1012 BO_PhA_MR17_3

NR1533

1026

1024 BO_PhA_MR18_4

BO_PhA_MR19_4

BO_PhA_MR20_41028

Common41030

1022 BO_PhA_MR17_4

Figure 6.2-12 Pin definition of MR input and output module 5

Pin No. Symbol Description

1001 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

1003 BI_PhA_MR17 Phase A input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.

1005 BI_PhA_MR18 Phase A input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.

1007 BI_PhA_MR19 Phase A input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.

1009 BI_PhA_MR20 Phase A input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

1010, 1002 BO_PhA_MR17_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.

1010, 1004 BO_PhA_MR18_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.

1010, 1006 BO_PhA_MR19_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.

1010, 1008 BO_PhA_MR20_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

1019, 1011 BO_PhA_MR17_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.

1019, 1013 BO_PhA_MR18_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.

1019, 1015 BO_PhA_MR19_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.

1019, 1017 BO_PhA_MR20_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.

Page 78: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-26 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

1020, 1012 BO_PhA_MR17_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.

1020, 1014 BO_PhA_MR18_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.

1020, 1016 BO_PhA_MR19_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.

1020, 1018 BO_PhA_MR20_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

1030, 1022 BO_PhA_MR17_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.

1030, 1024 BO_PhA_MR18_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.

1030, 1026 BO_PhA_MR19_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.

1030, 1028 BO_PhA_MR20_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.

Power supply input of module

1025 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

1029 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.6 IO Module 6 at Slot 11 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 6 at slot 11 position.

1107

1105

1103

1101 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhB_MR01Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhB_MR02

BI_PhB_MR03

1106

1104

1102 BO_PhB_MR01_1

BO_PhB_MR02_1

BO_PhB_MR03_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

1125Module Power Input

1129

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhB_MR04_11108

1109 BI_PhB_MR04

Common11110

1115

1113 BO_PhB_MR02_2

BO_PhB_MR03_2

BO_PhB_MR04_21117

Common21119

1111 BO_PhB_MR01_2

1116

1114 BO_PhB_MR02_3

BO_PhB_MR03_3

BO_PhB_MR04_31118

Common31120

1112 BO_PhB_MR01_3

NR1533

1126

1124 BO_PhB_MR02_4

BO_PhB_MR03_4

BO_PhB_MR04_41128

Common41130

1122 BO_PhB_MR01_4

Figure 6.2-13 Pin definition of MR input and output module 6

Page 79: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-27 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

1101 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

1103 BI_PhB_MR01 Phase B input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.

1105 BI_PhB_MR02 Phase B input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.

1107 BI_PhB_MR03 Phase B input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.

1109 BI_PhB_MR04 Phase B input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

1110, 1102 BO_PhB_MR01_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.

1110, 1104 BO_PhB_MR02_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.

1110, 1106 BO_PhB_MR03_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.

1110, 1108 BO_PhB_MR04_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

1119, 1111 BO_PhB_MR01_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.

1119, 1113 BO_PhB_MR02_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.

1119, 1115 BO_PhB_MR03_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.

1119, 1117 BO_PhB_MR04_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

1120, 1112 BO_PhB_MR01_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.

1120, 1114 BO_PhB_MR02_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.

1120, 1116 BO_PhB_MR03_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.

1120, 1118 BO_PhB_MR04_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

1130, 1122 BO_PhB_MR01_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.

1130, 1124 BO_PhB_MR02_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.

1130, 1126 BO_PhB_MR03_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.

1130, 1128 BO_PhB_MR04_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.

Power supply input of module

1125 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

1129 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.7 IO Module 7 at Slot 12 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 7 at slot 12 position.

Page 80: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-28 Date: 2013-05-17

1207

1205

1203

1201 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhB_MR05Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhB_MR06

BI_PhB_MR07

1206

1204

1202 BO_PhB_MR05_1

BO_PhB_MR06_1

BO_PhB_MR07_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

1225Module Power Input

1229

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhB_MR08_11208

1209 BI_PhB_MR08

Common11210

1215

1213 BO_PhB_MR06_2

BO_PhB_MR07_2

BO_PhB_MR08_21217

Common21219

1211 BO_PhB_MR05_2

1216

1214 BO_PhB_MR06_3

BO_PhB_MR07_3

BO_PhB_MR08_31218

Common31220

1212 BO_PhB_MR05_3

NR1533

1226

1224 BO_PhB_MR06_4

BO_PhB_MR07_4

BO_PhB_MR08_41228

Common41230

1222 BO_PhB_MR05_4

Figure 6.2-14 Pin definition of MR input and output module 7

Pin No. Symbol Description

1201 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

1203 BI_PhB_MR05 Phase B input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.

1205 BI_PhB_MR06 Phase B input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.

1207 BI_PhB_MR07 Phase B input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.

1209 BI_PhB_MR08 Phase B input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

1210, 1202 BO_PhB_MR05_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.

1210, 1204 BO_PhB_MR06_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.

1210, 1206 BO_PhB_MR07_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.

1210, 1208 BO_PhB_MR08_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

1219, 1211 BO_PhB_MR05_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.

1219, 1213 BO_PhB_MR06_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.

1219, 1215 BO_PhB_MR07_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.

1219, 1217 BO_PhB_MR08_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.

Page 81: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-29 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

1220, 1212 BO_PhB_MR05_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.

1220, 1214 BO_PhB_MR06_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.

1220, 1216 BO_PhB_MR07_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.

1220, 1218 BO_PhB_MR08_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

1230, 1222 BO_PhB_MR05_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.

1230, 1224 BO_PhB_MR06_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.

1230, 1226 BO_PhB_MR07_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.

1230, 1228 BO_PhB_MR08_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.

Power supply input of module

1225 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

1229 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.8 IO Module 8 at Slot 13 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 8 at slot 13 position.

1307

1305

1303

1301 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhB_MR09Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhB_MR10

BI_PhB_MR11

1306

1304

1302 BO_PhB_MR09_1

BO_PhB_MR10_1

BO_PhB_MR11_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

1325Module Power Input

1329

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhB_MR12_11308

1309 BI_PhB_MR12

Common11310

1315

1313 BO_PhB_MR10_2

BO_PhB_MR11_2

BO_PhB_MR12_21317

Common21319

1311 BO_PhB_MR09_2

1316

1314 BO_PhB_MR10_3

BO_PhB_MR11_3

BO_PhB_MR12_31318

Common31320

1312 BO_PhB_MR09_3

NR1533

1326

1324 BO_PhB_MR10_4

BO_PhB_MR11_4

BO_PhB_MR12_41328

Common41330

1322 BO_PhB_MR09_4

Figure 6.2-15 Pin definition of MR input and output module 8

Page 82: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-30 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

1301 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

1303 BI_PhB_MR09 Phase B input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.

1305 BI_PhB_MR10 Phase B input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.

1307 BI_PhB_MR11 Phase B input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.

1309 BI_PhB_MR12 Phase B input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

1310, 1302 BO_PhB_MR09_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.

1310, 1304 BO_PhB_MR10_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.

1310, 1306 BO_PhB_MR11_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.

1310, 1308 BO_PhB_MR12_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

1319, 1311 BO_PhB_MR09_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.

1319, 1313 BO_PhB_MR10_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.

1319, 1315 BO_PhB_MR11_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.

1319, 1317 BO_PhB_MR12_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

1320, 1312 BO_PhB_MR09_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.

1320, 1314 BO_PhB_MR10_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.

1320, 1316 BO_PhB_MR11_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.

1320, 1318 BO_PhB_MR12_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

1330, 1322 BO_PhB_MR09_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.

1330, 1324 BO_PhB_MR10_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.

1330, 1326 BO_PhB_MR11_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.

1330, 1328 BO_PhB_MR12_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.

Power supply input of module

1325 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

1329 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.9 IO Module 9 at Slot 14 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 9 at slot 14 position.

Page 83: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-31 Date: 2013-05-17

1407

1405

1403

1401 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhB_MR13Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhB_MR14

BI_PhB_MR15

1406

1404

1402 BO_PhB_MR13_1

BO_PhB_MR14_1

BO_PhB_MR15_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

1425Module Power Input

1429

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhB_MR16_11408

1414 BI_PhB_MR16

Common11410

1415

1413 BO_PhB_MR14_2

BO_PhB_MR15_2

BO_PhB_MR16_21417

Common21419

1411 BO_PhB_MR13_2

1416

1414 BO_PhB_MR14_3

BO_PhB_MR15_3

BO_PhB_MR16_31418

Common31420

1412 BO_PhB_MR13_3

NR1533

1426

1424 BO_PhB_MR14_4

BO_PhB_MR15_4

BO_PhB_MR16_41428

Common41430

1422 BO_PhB_MR13_4

Figure 6.2-16 Pin definition of MR input and output module 9

Pin No. Symbol Description

1401 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

1403 BI_PhB_MR13 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 13

1405 BI_PhB_MR14 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 14

1407 BI_PhB_MR15 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 15

1409 BI_PhB_MR16 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 16

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

1410, 1402 BO_PhB_MR13_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.

1410, 1404 BO_PhB_MR14_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.

1410, 1406 BO_PhB_MR15_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR15] is energized.

1410, 1408 BO_PhB_MR16_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

1419, 1411 BO_PhB_MR13_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.

1419, 1413 BO_PhB_MR14_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.

1419, 1415 BO_PhB_MR15_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.

1419, 1417 BO_PhB_MR16_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.

Page 84: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-32 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

1420, 1412 BO_PhB_MR13_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.

1420, 1414 BO_PhB_MR14_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.

1420, 1416 BO_PhB_MR15_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR15] is energized.

1420, 1418 BO_PhB_MR16_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

1430, 1422 BO_PhB_MR13_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.

1430, 1424 BO_PhB_MR14_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.

1430, 1426 BO_PhB_MR15_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR15] is energized.

1430, 1428 BO_PhB_MR16_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.

Power supply input of module

1425 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

1429 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.10 IO Module 10 at Slot 15 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 10 at slot 15 position.

1507

1505

1503

1501 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhB_MR17Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhB_MR18

BI_PhB_MR19

1506

1504

1502 BO_PhB_MR17_1

BO_PhB_MR18_1

BO_PhB_MR19_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

1525Module Power Input

1529

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhB_MR20_11508

1509 BI_PhB_MR20

Common11510

1515

1513 BO_PhB_MR18_2

BO_PhB_MR19_2

BO_PhB_MR20_21517

Common21519

1511 BO_PhB_MR17_2

1516

1514 BO_PhB_MR18_3

BO_PhB_MR19_3

BO_PhB_MR20_31518

Common31520

1512 BO_PhB_MR17_3

NR1533

1526

1524 BO_PhB_MR18_4

BO_PhB_MR19_4

BO_PhB_MR20_41528

Common41530

1522 BO_PhB_MR17_4

Figure 6.2-17 Pin definition of MR input and output module 10

Page 85: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-33 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

1501 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

1503 BI_PhB_MR17 Phase B input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.

1505 BI_PhB_MR18 Phase B input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.

1507 BI_PhB_MR19 Phase B input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.

1509 BI_PhB_MR20 Phase B input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

1510, 1502 BO_PhB_MR17_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.

1510, 1504 BO_PhB_MR18_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.

1510, 1506 BO_PhB_MR19_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.

1510, 1508 BO_PhB_MR20_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

1519, 1511 BO_PhB_MR17_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.

1519, 1513 BO_PhB_MR18_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.

1519, 1515 BO_PhB_MR19_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.

1519, 1517 BO_PhB_MR20_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

1520, 1512 BO_PhB_MR17_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.

1520, 1514 BO_PhB_MR18_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.

1520, 1516 BO_PhB_MR19_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.

1520, 1518 BO_PhB_MR20_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

1530, 1522 BO_PhB_MR17_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.

1530, 1524 BO_PhB_MR18_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.

1530, 1526 BO_PhB_MR19_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.

1530, 1528 BO_PhB_MR20_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.

Power supply input of module

1525 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

1529 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.11 IO Module 11 at Slot 25 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 11 at slot 25 position.

Page 86: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-34 Date: 2013-05-17

2507

2505

2503

2501 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhC_MR01Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhC_MR02

BI_PhC_MR03

2506

2504

2502 BO_PhC_MR01_1

BO_PhC_MR02_1

BO_PhC_MR03_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

2525Module Power Input

2529

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhC_MR04_12508

2509 BI_PhC_MR04

Common12510

2515

2513 BO_PhC_MR02_2

BO_PhC_MR03_2

BO_PhC_MR04_22517

Common22519

2511 BO_PhC_MR01_2

2516

2514 BO_PhC_MR02_3

BO_PhC_MR03_3

BO_PhC_MR04_32518

Common32520

2512 BO_PhC_MR01_3

NR1533

2526

2524 BO_PhC_MR02_4

BO_PhC_MR03_4

BO_PhC_MR04_42528

Common42530

2522 BO_PhC_MR01_4

Figure 6.2-18 Pin definition of MR input and output module 11

Pin No. Symbol Description

2501 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

2503 BI_PhC_MR01 Phase C input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.

2505 BI_PhC_MR02 Phase C input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.

2507 BI_PhC_MR03 Phase C input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.

2509 BI_PhC_MR04 Phase C input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

2510, 2502 BO_PhC_MR01_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.

2510, 2504 BO_PhC_MR02_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.

2510, 2506 BO_PhC_MR03_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.

2510, 2508 BO_PhC_MR04_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

2519, 2511 BO_PhC_MR01_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.

2519, 2513 BO_PhC_MR02_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.

2519, 2515 BO_PhC_MR03_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.

2519, 2517 BO_PhC_MR04_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.

Page 87: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-35 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

2520, 2512 BO_PhC_MR01_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.

2520, 2514 BO_PhC_MR02_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.

2520, 2516 BO_PhC_MR03_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.

2520, 2518 BO_PhC_MR04_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

2530, 2522 BO_PhC_MR01_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.

2530, 2524 BO_PhC_MR02_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.

2530, 2526 BO_PhC_MR03_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.

2530, 2528 BO_PhC_MR04_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.

Power supply input of module

2525 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

2529 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.12 IO Module 12 at Slot 26 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 12 at slot 26 position.

2607

2605

2603

2601 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhC_MR05Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhC_MR06

BI_PhC_MR07

2606

2604

2602 BO_PhC_MR05_1

BO_PhC_MR06_1

BO_PhC_MR07_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

2625Module Power Input

2629

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhC_MR08_12608

2609 BI_PhC_MR08

Common12610

2615

2613 BO_PhC_MR06_2

BO_PhC_MR07_2

BO_PhC_MR08_22617

Common22619

2611 BO_PhC_MR05_2

2616

2614 BO_PhC_MR06_3

BO_PhC_MR07_3

BO_PhC_MR08_32618

Common32620

2612 BO_PhC_MR05_3

NR1533

2626

2624 BO_PhC_MR06_4

BO_PhC_MR07_4

BO_PhC_MR08_42628

Common42630

2622 BO_PhC_MR05_4

Figure 6.2-19 Pin definition of MR input and output module 12

Page 88: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-36 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

2601 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

2603 BI_PhC_MR05 Phase C input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.

2605 BI_PhC_MR06 Phase C input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.

2607 BI_PhC_MR07 Phase C input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.

2609 BI_PhC_MR08 Phase C input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

2610, 2602 BO_PhC_MR05_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.

2610, 2604 BO_PhC_MR06_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.

2610, 2606 BO_PhC_MR07_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.

2610, 2608 BO_PhC_MR08_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

2619, 2611 BO_PhC_MR05_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.

2619, 2613 BO_PhC_MR06_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.

2619, 2615 BO_PhC_MR07_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.

2619, 2617 BO_PhC_MR08_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

2620, 2612 BO_PhC_MR05_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.

2620, 2614 BO_PhC_MR06_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.

2620, 2616 BO_PhC_MR07_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.

2620, 2618 BO_PhC_MR08_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

2630, 2622 BO_PhC_MR5_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.

2630, 2624 BO_PhC_MR6_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.

2630, 2626 BO_PhC_MR7_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.

2630, 2628 BO_PhC_MR8_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.

Power supply input of module

2625 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

2629 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.13 IO Module 13 at Slot 27 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 13 at slot 27 position.

Page 89: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-37 Date: 2013-05-17

2707

2705

2703

2701 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhC_MR09Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhC_MR10

BI_PhC_MR11

2706

2704

2702 BO_PhC_MR09_1

BO_PhC_MR10_1

BO_PhC_MR11_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

2725Module Power Input

2729

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhC_MR12_12708

2709 BI_PhC_MR12

Common12710

2715

2713 BO_PhC_MR10_2

BO_PhC_MR11_2

BO_PhC_MR12_22717

Common22719

2711 BO_PhC_MR09_2

2716

2714 BO_PhC_MR10_3

BO_PhC_MR11_3

BO_PhC_MR12_32718

Common32720

2712 BO_PhC_MR09_3

NR1533

2726

2724 BO_PhC_MR10_4

BO_PhC_MR11_4

BO_PhC_MR12_42728

Common42730

2722 BO_PhC_MR09_4

Figure 6.2-20 Pin definition of MR input and output module 13

Pin No. Symbol Description

2701 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

2703 BI_PhC_MR09 Phase C input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.

2705 BI_PhC_MR10 Phase C input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.

2707 BI_PhC_MR11 Phase C input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.

2709 BI_PhC_MR12 Phase C input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

2710, 2702 BO_PhC_MR9_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.

2710, 2704 BO_PhC_MR10_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.

2710, 2706 BO_PhC_MR11_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.

2710, 2708 BO_PhC_MR12_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

2719, 2711 BO_PhC_MR9_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.

2719, 2713 BO_PhC_MR10_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.

2719, 2715 BO_PhC_MR11_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.

2719, 2717 BO_PhC_MR12_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.

Page 90: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-38 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

2720, 2712 BO_PhC_MR9_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.

2720, 2714 BO_PhC_MR10_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.

2720, 2716 BO_PhC_MR11_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.

2720, 2718 BO_PhC_MR12_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

2730, 2722 BO_PhC_MR9_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.

2730, 2724 BO_PhC_MR10_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.

2730, 2726 BO_PhC_MR11_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.

2730, 2728 BO_PhC_MR12_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.

Power supply input of module

2725 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

2729 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.14 IO Module 14 at Slot 28 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 14 at slot 28 position.

2807

2805

2803

2801 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhC_MR13Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhC_MR14

BI_PhC_MR15

2806

2804

2802 BO_PhC_MR13_1

BO_PhC_MR14_1

BO_PhC_MR15_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

2825Module Power Input

2829

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhC_MR16_12808

2828 BI_PhC_MR16

Common12810

2815

2813 BO_PhC_MR14_2

BO_PhC_MR15_2

BO_PhC_MR16_22817

Common22819

2811 BO_PhC_MR13_2

2816

2814 BO_PhC_MR14_3

BO_PhC_MR15_3

BO_PhC_MR16_32818

Common32820

2812 BO_PhC_MR13_3

NR1533

2826

2824 BO_PhC_MR14_4

BO_PhC_MR15_4

BO_PhC_MR16_42828

Common42830

2822 BO_PhC_MR13_4

Figure 6.2-21 Pin definition of MR input and output module 14

Page 91: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-39 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

2801 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

2803 BI_PhC_MR13 Phase C input signal of MR13 mechanical relay.

2805 BI_PhC_MR14 Phase C input signal of MR14 mechanical relay.

2807 BI_PhC_MR15 Phase C input signal of MR15 mechanical relay.

2809 BI_PhC_MR16 Phase C input signal of MR16 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

2810, 2802 BO_PhC_MR13_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR13] is energized.

2810, 2804 BO_PhC_MR14_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR14] is energized.

2810, 2806 BO_PhC_MR15_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.

2810, 2808 BO_PhC_MR16_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

2819, 2811 BO_PhC_MR13_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR13] is energized.

2819, 2813 BO_PhC_MR14_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR14] is energized.

2819, 2815 BO_PhC_MR15_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.

2819, 2817 BO_PhC_MR16_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

2820, 2812 BO_PhC_MR13_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.

2820, 2814 BO_PhC_MR14_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.

2820, 2816 BO_PhC_MR15_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.

2820, 2818 BO_PhC_MR16_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

2830, 2822 BO_PhC_MR13_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR13] is energized.

2830, 2824 BO_PhC_MR14_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR14] is energized.

2830, 2826 BO_PhC_MR15_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.

2830, 2828 BO_PhC_MR16_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.

Power supply input of module

2825 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

2829 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.7.15 IO Module 15 at Slot 29 (NR1533)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 15 at slot 29 position.

Page 92: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-40 Date: 2013-05-17

2907

2905

2903

2901 Reset Signal ResetInput

BI_PhC_MR17Binary Input

Signals of

Mechanical

protection

Hig

h V

olta

ge

BI_PhC_MR18

BI_PhC_MR19

2906

2904

2902 BO_PhC_MR17_1

BO_PhC_MR18_1

BO_PhC_MR19_1

NR1533 (MR IO Module)

2925Module Power Input

2929

Pwr+

Pwr -

BO_PhC_MR20_12908

2909 BI_PhC_MR20

Common12910

2929

2913 BO_PhC_MR18_2

BO_PhC_MR19_2

BO_PhC_MR20_22917

Common22919

2911 BO_PhC_MR17_2

2916

2914 BO_PhC_MR18_3

BO_PhC_MR19_3

BO_PhC_MR20_32918

Common32920

2912 BO_PhC_MR17_3

NR1533

2926

2924 BO_PhC_MR18_4

BO_PhC_MR19_4

BO_PhC_MR20_42928

Common42930

2922 BO_PhC_MR17_4

Figure 6.2-22 Pin definition of MR input and output module 15

Pin No. Symbol Description

2901 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched

contacts of mechanical signals are reset.

Mechanical signal inputs

2903 BI_PhC_MR17 Phase C input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.

2905 BI_PhC_MR18 Phase C input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.

2907 BI_PhC_MR19 Phase C input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.

2909 BI_PhC_MR20 Phase C input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.

1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal

2910, 2902 BO_PhC_MR17_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.

2910, 2904 BO_PhC_MR18_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.

2910, 2906 BO_PhC_MR19_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.

2910, 2908 BO_PhC_MR20_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.

2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal

2919, 2911 BO_PhC_MR17_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.

2919, 2913 BO_PhC_MR18_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.

2919, 2915 BO_PhC_MR19_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.

2919, 2917 BO_PhC_MR20_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.

Page 93: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-41 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Symbol Description

3rd group output contacts as remote signal

2920, 2912 BO_PhC_MR17_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.

2920, 2914 BO_PhC_MR18_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.

2920, 2916 BO_PhC_MR19_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.

2920, 2918 BO_PhC_MR20_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.

4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal

2930, 2922 BO_PhC_MR17_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.

2930, 2924 BO_PhC_MR18_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.

2930, 2926 BO_PhC_MR19_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.

2930, 2928 BO_PhC_MR20_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.

Power supply input of module

2925 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

2929 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply

6.2.8 RLY Output Module (Relay Output )

Two relay output modules (NR1544) are equipped at slot 22 and slot 24, which are used to extend

more tripping output contacts.

6.2.8.1 Relay Module 1 at Slot 22 (NR1544)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of relay output module 1 at slot 22

position.

Page 94: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-42 Date: 2013-05-17

NR1544

2206

2205

2213

2207

2215

2214

2211

2210

2204

2203

2208

2209

2222

2221

2218

2212

2220

2219

22161

st g

rou

p o

f tr

ip o

utp

ut co

nta

cts

22172

nd

gro

up

of tr

ip o

utp

ut co

nta

cts

BO_Trp_1

2223

2202

2224

2225

2226

2228

2201 Input1

2227 Common

BO_LossPwr_MR

An

nu

ncia

tio

n

Sig

na

l

Signal Input

(high voltage +) Input2

2229Module Power Input

2230

Pwr +

From power supply -

From power supply +

Pwr -

BO_Trp_2

BO_Trp_3

BO_Trp_4

BO_Trp_5

BO_Trp_6

BO_Trp_7

BO_Trp_8

BO_Trp_9

BO_Trp_10

BO_Trp_11

BO_Trp_12

Figure 6.2-23 Pin definition of relay output module 1

Pin No. Sign Description

2229 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply

2230 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply

Signal input

2201 Input1 Signal input to initiate the 1st group of trip output contacts

2202 Input2 Signal input to initiate the 2nd group of trip output contacts

1st Group of trip output contacts

2203, 2204 BO_Trp_1

NO contacts, are closed when pin 2201 is energized by DC high voltage.

2205, 2206 BO_Trp_2

2207, 2208 BO_Trp_3

2209, 2210 BO_Trp_4

2211, 2212 BO_Trp_5

2213, 2214 BO_Trp_6

2nd group of trip output contacts

2215, 2216 BO_Trp_7

NO contacts, are closed when pin 2201 is energized by DC high voltage. 2217, 2218 BO_Trp_8

2219, 2220 BO_Trp_9

Page 95: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-43 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Sign Description

2221, 2222 BO_Trp_10

2223, 2224 BO_Trp_11

2225, 2226 BO_Trp_12

Annunciation signals (magnetic latched contact)

2227, 2228 BO_LossPwr_MR NC contact, is closed when power of this board is lost.

6.2.8.2 Relay Module 1 at Slot 24 (NR1544)

The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of relay output module 1 at slot 24

position.

NR1544

2406

2405

2413

2407

2415

2414

2411

2410

2404

2403

2408

2409

2422

2421

2418

2412

2420

2419

2416

1st g

rou

p o

f tr

ip o

utp

ut co

nta

cts

2417

2n

d g

rou

p o

f tr

ip o

utp

ut co

nta

cts

BO_Trp_1

2423

2402

2424

2425

2426

2428

2401 Input1

2427 Common

BO_LossPwr_MR

An

nu

ncia

tio

n

Sig

na

l

Signal Input

(high voltage +) Input2

2429Module Power Input

2430

Pwr +

From power supply -

From power supply +

Pwr -

BO_Trp_2

BO_Trp_3

BO_Trp_4

BO_Trp_5

BO_Trp_6

BO_Trp_7

BO_Trp_8

BO_Trp_9

BO_Trp_10

BO_Trp_11

BO_Trp_12

Figure 6.2-24 Pin definition of relay output module 1

Pin No. Sign Description

2429 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply

2430 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply

Signal input

2401 Input1 Signal input to initiate the 1st group of trip output contacts

2402 Input2 Signal input to initiate the 2nd group of trip output contacts

1st Group of trip output contacts

Page 96: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-44 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Sign Description

2403, 2404 BO_Trp_1

NO contacts, are closed when pin 2401 is energized by DC high voltage.

2405, 2406 BO_Trp_2

2407, 2408 BO_Trp_3

2409, 2410 BO_Trp_4

2411, 2412 BO_Trp_5

2413, 2414 BO_Trp_6

2nd group of trip output contacts

2415, 2416 BO_Trp_7

NO contacts, are closed when pin 2401 is energized by DC high voltage.

2417, 2418 BO_Trp_8

2419, 2420 BO_Trp_9

2421, 2422 BO_Trp_10

2423, 2424 BO_Trp_11

2425, 2426 BO_Trp_12

Annunciation signals (magnetic latched contact)

2427, 2428 BO_LossPwr_MR NC contact, is closed when power of this board is lost.

6.2.9 AC AI Module (AC Analog Input)

6.2.9.1 AC Analog Input Module (NR1401)

The protection device which supports ECVT should not be equipped with this module. The analog

input module can transform these high AC input values to relevant low AC output value for the

DSP module. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels

appropriate to the electronic circuitry of this device and to provide effective isolation between this

device and the power system. A low pass filter circuit is connected to each transformer (CT or VT)

secondary circuit for reducing the noise of each analog AC input signal.

NOTE! The rated value of the input current transformer is optional: 1A or 5A. The rated

value of the CT must be definitely declared in the technical scheme and the contract.

NOTE! Because the rated value of the input current transformer is optional, it is

necessary to check whether the rated values of the current transformer inputs are

accordant to the demand of the engineering before putting the device into operation.

A 24-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is

described as below.

Page 97: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-45 Date: 2013-05-17

NR1401

NR1401

01

03

05

07

09

11

13

15

17

19

02

04

06

08

10

12

14

16

18

20

U2

U3 U3n

I6

21

23

22

24

U4

U5

U6

U4n

U6n

U5n

I1 I1n

I2 I2n

I3 I3n

I4 I4n

I5 I5n

I6n

U2n

U1 U1n

Figure 6.2-25 Pin definition of AC analog output module

NOTE! In above figure, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, I6, I7, I8, I9, I10, I11, I12 and U1, U2, U3, U4,

U5, U6 are polarity terminals of corresponding relevant voltage and current inputs

respectively.

NOTE! If user needs other analog input configuration, please declare in the technical

scheme and the contract.

The pin definition of the AC analog input module at slot 04 is shown as follows.

Pin No. Original

Symbol

New-defined

Symbol Description

0401 I1 Ia The phase A current input.

0402 I1n Ian

0403 I2 Ib The phase B current input.

0404 I2n Ibn

0405 I3 Ic The phase C current input.

0406 I3n Icn

Page 98: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-46 Date: 2013-05-17

Pin No. Original

Symbol

New-defined

Symbol Description

0407 I4 Not used

0408 I4n

0409 I5 Not used

0410 I5n

0411 I6 Not used

0412 I6n

0413 U1 Not used

0414 U1n

0415 U2 Not used

0416 U2n

0417 U3 Not used

0418 U3n

0419 U4 Not used

0420 U4n

0421 U5 Not used

0422 U5n

0423 U6 Not used

0424 U6n

6.2.9.2 CT Requirement

-Rated primary current Ipn:

According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.

-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:

According to the maximum load current.

-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:

According to the maximum fault current.

-Rated secondary current Isn

-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:

Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)

Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)

Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)

Page 99: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-47 Date: 2013-05-17

Isn Rated secondary current (amps)

Kalf Accuracy limit factor

Kalf = Ipal / Ipn

Ipal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Performance verification

Esl > Esl’

Esl Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl = kalf*Isn*(Rct+Rbn)

Kalf Accuracy limit factor

Kalf =Ipal/Ipn

Ipal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Isn Rated secondary current (amps)

Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)

Rbn Rated resistance burden(ohms)

Rbn=Sbn/Isn2

Sbn Rated burden (VAs)

Esl’ Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl’ = k*Ipcf *Isn*(Rct+Rb)/Ipn

k Stability factor = 2

Ipcf Protective checking factor current (amps)

Same as the maximum prospective fault current

Isn Rated secondary current (amps)

Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)

Rb Real resistance burden (ohms)

Rb =Rr+2*RL+ RC

RC Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm(ohms)

RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current

transformer(ohms)

Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)

Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

For example,Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA

Esl = kalf*Isn*(Rct+Rbn) = kalf*Isn*(Rct+ Sbn/Isn2)= 30*5*(1+60/52)=510V

Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A

Esl’ = 2*Ipcf *Isn*(Rct+Rb)/Ipn= 2*Ipcf *Isn*(Rct+( Rr +2*RL+ RC))/Ipn

= 2*40000*5*(1+(0.1+2*0.5+0.1))/2000=440V

Esl > Esl’

Page 100: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-48 Date: 2013-05-17

6.2.10 HMI Module

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.

The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,

keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through serial port etc. The liquid crystal

display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a

user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

6.3 Scheme Diagram of Input and Output of MR

According to the difference of the importance of transformer MR protection, the mechanical signals

are classified into two groups described in the following sections. They may lead to different

equipment operation.

(1) MR signals (MR1~MR20, three phase signals) are repeated to issue trip command directly are

connected to the corresponding terminals of each phase to initiate trip output relays without

time delay and send out warning signals immediately.

(2) Some MR signals (MR1~MR4, three phase signals) are repeated to issue trip command with

time delay are connected to corresponding terminals of each phase to initiate trip output relays

with time delay which can be configured in the equipment, and send out warning signals

immediately.

NOTE! The wiring of binary input, signal output and tripping output of mechanical

protection is shown in the following figures, in which dashed lines are the external wiring

for panel design. The following design is only a recommended design which can be

changed according to user requirements by panel wiring designer.

Page 101: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-49 Date: 2013-05-17

BI_PhA_MR5

BI_PhA_MR2

BI_PhA_MR8

BI_PhA_MR1

BI_PhA_MR6

BI_PhA_MR7

BI_PhA_MR10

BI_PhA_MR3

BI_PhA_MR9

BI_PhA_MR11

BI_PhA_MR12

Ph

ase

A b

ina

ry In

pu

t o

f M

ech

an

ica

l S

ign

als

BI_PhA_MR4

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAYBI_PhA_MR15

BI_PhA_MR13

BI_PhA_OilTemp

BI_PhA_MR16

Ext._Pwr + Ext._Pwr -

0629

0729

0829

0929

0603

0605

0607

0609

0703

0705

0707

0709

0803

0805

0807

0809

0903

0905

0907

0909

Contact from Transformer MR

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

10291003

1005

1007

1009

BI_PhA_MR19

BI_PhA_MR17

BI_PhA_MR18

BI_PhA_MR20

Figure 6.3-1 MR phase A input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG

Page 102: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-50 Date: 2013-05-17

BI_PhB_MR5

BI_PhB_MR2

BI_PhB_MR8

BI_PhB_Cool

BI_PhB_MR6

BI_PhB_MR7

BI_PhB_MR10

BI_PhB_MR3

BI_PhB_MR9

BI_PhB_MR11

BI_PhB_MR12

Ph

ase

B b

ina

ry In

pu

t o

f M

ech

an

ica

l S

ign

als

BI_PhB_MR4

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAYBI_PhB_MR15

BI_PhB_MR13

BI_PhB_OilTemp

BI_PhB_MR16

Ext._Pwr + Ext._Pwr -

1129

1229

1329

1429

1103

1105

1107

1109

1203

1205

1207

1209

1303

1305

1307

1309

1403

1405

1407

1409

Contact from Transformer MR

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

15291503

1505

1507

1509

BI_PhB_MR19

BI_PhB_MR17

BI_PhB_MR18

BI_PhB_MR20

Figure 6.3-2 MR phase B input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG

Page 103: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-51 Date: 2013-05-17

BI_PhC_MR5

BI_PhC_MR2

BI_PhC_MR8

BI_PhC_Cool

BI_PhC_MR6

BI_PhC_MR7

BI_PhC_MR10

BI_PhC_MR3

BI_PhC_MR9

BI_PhC_MR11

BI_PhC_MR12

Ph

ase

C b

ina

ry In

pu

t o

f M

ech

an

ica

l S

ign

als

BI_PhC_MR4

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAYBI_PhC_MR15

BI_PhC_MR13

BI_PhC_OilTemp

BI_PhC_MR16

Ext._Pwr + Ext._Pwr -

2529

2629

2729

2829

2503

2505

2507

2509

2603

2605

2607

2609

2703

2705

2707

2709

2803

2805

2807

2809

Contact from Transformer MR

R

R

R

R

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

29292903

2905

2907

2909

BI_PhC_MR19

BI_PhC_MR17

BI_PhC_MR18

BI_PhC_MR20

Figure 6.3-3 MR phase C input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG

Page 104: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

6 Hardware Description

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-52 Date: 2013-05-17

BO_Trp_DlyMR2

BO_PhB_MR5

BO_PhA_MR5

BO_Trp_DlyMR1

BO_Trp_DlyMR3

BO_PhC_MR5

Sig

na

ls o

f M

R p

rote

ctio

n w

ith

tim

e d

ela

y to

in

itia

te trip

ou

tpu

t

rela

y

R

RS

ign

als

of M

R p

rote

ctio

n w

ith

ou

t T

ime

De

lay to

In

itia

te T

rip

Ou

tpu

t R

ela

y

1717

0719

1219

0711

1211

2202

2201 2230

Ext._Pwr +

Ext._Pwr +

Ext._Pwr -

Isolator LinkOutput Relay

Group1

Output Relay

Group2

BO_Trp_DlyMR4

R

R

2402

2401

Output Relay

Group1

Output Relay

Group2

2619 2611

0719

1219

0713

1213

2619 2613

0719

1219

0715

1215

2619 2615

0719

1219

0717

1217

2619 2617

0819

1319

0811

1311

2719 2711

BO_PhB_MR6

BO_PhA_MR6

BO_PhC_MR6

BO_PhB_MR7

BO_PhA_MR7

BO_PhC_MR7

BO_PhB_MR8

BO_PhA_MR8

BO_PhC_MR8

BO_PhB_MR9

BO_PhA_MR9

BO_PhC_MR9

2430

1719

1721

1723

1718

1720

1722

1724

Figure 6.3-4 MR tripping output contacts association diagram of PCS-974FG

6.4 Output Signals

PCS-974FG provides three kinds of signals for every event, remote signals, annunciation signals

and DFR signals. The event may be a mechanical signal from transformer mechanical relay, an

equipment failure, an equipment alarm or activation of pole-disagreement protection element.

All the signals are issued by closing the normal open contacts of signal relays whenever an event

happens. What matters is that the local signal relay is a bistable-relay, whenever an event

happens, the normal open contact of this relay will pick up and latch. The annunciation signal relay

will not drop off automatically after the event disappears except to reset manually. Annunciation

signal relays on two relay output modules can be reset by the reset button on the equipment front

panel or by the binary input [BI_RstTarg]. And annunciation signals on IO module can be reset by

a reset input terminal.

Page 105: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-a

Date: 2013-05-17

7 Settings

Table of Contents

7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Device Settings ................................................................................................ 7-1

7.3 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-1

7.4 System Settings ............................................................................................... 7-6

7.5 Protection Settings .......................................................................................... 7-6

7.6 Logic Links ....................................................................................................... 7-8

7.7 Label Settings .................................................................................................. 7-9

List of Tables

Table 7.2-1 Device setting list .................................................................................................. 7-1

Table 7.3-1 Communication setting list ................................................................................... 7-1

Table 7.4-1 System setting list ................................................................................................. 7-6

Table 7.5-1 Protection settings list .......................................................................................... 7-7

Table 7.6-1 Function logic link list ........................................................................................... 7-9

Table 7.7-1 Label setting list of MR .......................................................................................... 7-9

Page 106: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay
Page 107: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-1

Date: 2013-05-17

7.1 Overview

The equipment has 10 setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system

operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, common settings are shared by all

protection setting groups, and settings of protection element are set according to secondary

values.

7.2 Device Settings

Setting list

Table 7.2-1 Device setting list

No. Setting Item Range Description

1 HDR_EncodeMode GB18030, UTF-8

Select encoding format of header (HDR) file

COMTRADE recording file. Default value is

“UTF-8”.

2 Un_BinaryInput 24V, 48V, 110V, 220V Voltage level of binary input

Setting explanation

1. [HDR_EncodeMode]

The setting is to select encoding format of header file .Default value of [HDR_EncodeMode] is

1((i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0(i.e. GB18030) according to the special requirement.

2. [Un_BinaryInput]

The setting is used to set the voltage level of binary input module. 24V and 48V can be selected

when low-voltage BI module is equipped and 110V or 220V can be selected when high voltage

BI module is equipped.

Setting path

Access path in menu is:

Main menu -> Settings -> Device Setup -> Device Settings

7.3 Communication Settings

Setting list

Table 7.3-1 Communication setting list

No. Settings item Range Description

1 IP_LAN1 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 IP address of Ethernet port 1.

Page 108: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-2

Date: 2013-05-17

No. Settings item Range Description

2 Mask_LAN1 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1.

3 IP_LAN2 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 IP address of Ethernet port 2.

4 Mask_LAN2 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 2.

5 En_LAN2 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable the IP address of port 2.

6 IP_LAN3 0: disable, 1: enable IP address of Ethernet port 3.

7 Mask_LAN3 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 3.

8 En_LAN3 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable the IP address of port 3.

9 IP_LAN4 0: disable, 1: enable IP address of Ethernet port 4.

10 Mask_LAN4 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 4.

11 En_LAN4 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable the IP address of port 4.

12 Gateway 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255 Gateway of router

13 En_Broadcast 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable sending message in broadcast

mode via network. (IEC103).

14 Addr_RS485A 0~255

Communication address between the protective

device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial

port 1.

15 Baud_RS485A 4800,9600,19200,

38400,57600,115200 bps Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1.

16 Protocol_RS485A 0~9

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port

1.

0: IEC60870-5-103;

1: Modbus

2: Reserved

Others: Not available

17 Addr_RS485B 0~255

Communication address between the protective

device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial

port 2.

18 Baud_RS485B 4800,9600,19200,

38400,57600,115200 bps Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 2.

Page 109: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-3

Date: 2013-05-17

No. Settings item Range Description

19 Protocol_RS485B 0~9

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port

2.

0: IEC60870-5-103;

1: Modbus

2: Reserved

Others: Not available

20 Threshold_Measmt 0~100%

Threshold value of sending measurement values to

SCADA through IEC103 or IEC61850 protocol.

Default value: “1%”.

21 Period_Measmt 0~65535s

The time period when the equipment sends

measurement data to SCADA through IEC103

protocol.

Default value:“60”.

22 Format_Measmt 0, 1 Select the format of measurement data sent to

SCADA through IEC103 protocol.

23 Baud_Printer

4800,9600,

19200,38400, 57600,

115200 bps

Baud rate of printer port

24 En_AutoPrint 0: disable

1: enable Enable/disable automatic printing function

25 Opt_TimeSyn

Conventional

SAS

Advanced

NoTimeSyn

Select the mode of time synchronization of

equipment.

26 IP_Server_SNTP 000.000.000.000~

255.255.255.255

The address of the external SNTP clock

synchronization server sending SNTP message to

the equipment.

27 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12hrs The local time zone also referred to as the hour

offset hour from UTC .

28 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60min The offset minute of local time from UTC.

29 Opt_Display_Status Primary value/

Second value

Select display measurement values is primary value

or secondary value

Setting explanation

1. [En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)

These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP

address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.

“1”: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to

be set.

Page 110: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-4

Date: 2013-05-17

“0”: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed

to be set.

2. [En_Broadcast]

This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting

must be set as “1”.

0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;

1: the device sends UDP messages through network.

3. [Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)

The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port X.

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

1: Reserved

2: Modbus protocol

4. [Format_Measmt]

The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103

protocol.

0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;

1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard.

5. [En_AutoPrint]

If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be

set as “1”.

6. [Opt_TimeSyn]

There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time

clock synchronization signals shown in following table.

Item Description

Conventional

PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.

IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.

PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].

PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].

SAS

SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.

Advanced

IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.

IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.

PPS(Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.

NoTimeSyn When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select

Page 111: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-5

Date: 2013-05-17

Item Description

this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSync] will not be issued anymore.

“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by device, but “Advanced” mode

is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be

issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.

1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device

will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there

is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically

with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP module,“SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal

[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.

3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without

NOTE! The clock message via IEC103 protocol is invalid when the device receives the

IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.

7. [IP_Server_SNTP]

It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to

the relay or BCU.

8. [OffsetHour_UTC], [OffsetMinute_UTC]

When the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, if the time tags of communication

messages are required according to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), the two settings are

used to set the local time of a country or area where the relay is installed. If there is no such a

requirement, the two settings must be set as “0”.

Example 1: In China where UTC offset is UTC +8:00, [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC]

should be set as “8hrs” and “0min” respectively.

Example 2: In Argentina where UTC offset is UTC-3:00, [OffsetHour_UTC] and

[OffsetMinute_UTC] should be set as “-3hrs” and “0min” respectively.

Example 3: In Nepal where UTC offset is UTC +5:45, [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC]

should be set as “+5hrs” and “45min” respectively.

Time zone GMT zone East 1st East 2nd East 3rd East 4th East 5th

Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5

Time zone East 6th East 7th East 8th East 9th East 10th East 11th

Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11

Time zone East/West 12th West 1st West 2nd West 3rd West 4th West 5th

Setting -12/12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5

Time zone West 6th West 7th West 8th West 9th West 10th West 11th

Page 112: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-6

Date: 2013-05-17

Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11

Setting Path

Access path in menu is:

Main Menu -> Settings -> Device Setup -> Comm Settings

7.4 System Settings

Setting list

Table 7.4-1 System setting list

No. Setting Item Range Step Unit Description

1 Active_Grp 1~10 1 Current setting group.

2 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20

characters

Name of the protected primary equipment, such as

transformer, line, etc.

3 I1n 0~60000 1 A Primary rated current of CT.

4 I2n 1A or 5A A Secondary rated current of CT.

NOTE! Symbol ”x” represents some side of transformer or VT/CT type only defined by

user through PCS-Explore software, which may be “HVS”(HV side), “MVS”(MV side),

etc.

Setting explanation

1. [ Active_Grp]

The current protection setting group number, and total 10 group settings are provided. The device

settings, communication settings and system settings, are common for all protection groups.

2. [I1n], [I2n]

Set those settings respectively according to the actual primary value and secondary value of CT.

Setting path

Access path in menu is:

Main Menu -> Settings -> System Settings

7.5 Protection Settings

NOTE! There are some symbols mentioned in the following sections and the meaning of

them is given here.

Page 113: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-7

Date: 2013-05-17

In – rated secondary current of CT.

NOTE: All the protection settings in Table 7.5-1 must be configured on the base of

secondary value, where [I2n] is the secondary rated current of CT.

Table 7.5-1 Protection settings list

No. Setting Item Range Step Unit Description

1 62PD.3I0_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of residual overcurrent element

for pole disagreement protection.

2 62PD.I2_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A

Current setting of negative-sequence

overcurrent element for pole disagreement

protection.

3 62PD.t1_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of pole disagreement protection

delay 1.

4 62PD.t2_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of pole disagreement protection

delay 2.

5 50BF.Ip_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of phase overcurrent element for

breaker failure initiation.

6 50BF.3I0_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of residual overcurrent element

for breaker failure initiation.

7 50BF.I2_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of negative-sequence

overcurrent element for breaker failure initiation.

8 50BF.t1_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of breaker failure initiation delay 1.

9 50BF.t2_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of breaker failure initiation delay 2.

10 MR1.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR1 for tripping.

11 MR1.t_OpDly 0~12000 0.001 s Time delay of MR1 for tripping.

12 MR2.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR2 for tripping.

13 MR3.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR3 for tripping.

14 MR4.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR4 for tripping.

15 62PD.En_t1 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling pole

disagreement protection delay 1.

16 62PD.En_t2 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling pole

disagreement protection delay 2.

17 62PD.En_3I0 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling residual

overcurrent element to control pole

disagreement protection.

18 62PD.En_I2 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling

zero-sequence overcurrent element to control

pole disagreement protection.

19 62PD.En_Ip 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling phase

overcurrent element to control pole

Page 114: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-8

Date: 2013-05-17

No. Setting Item Range Step Unit Description

disagreement protection.

20 62PD.En_ExTrp_t2 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling external

tripping signal to control pole disagreement

protection delay 2

21 50BF.En_t1 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling breaker

failure initation delay 1.

22 50BF.En_t2 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling breaker

failure initation delay 2.

23 50BF.En_3I0 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling residual

overcurrent element to control breaker failure

initation.

24 50BF.En_I2 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling

zero-sequence overcurrent element to control

breaker failure initation.

25 50BF.En_ExTrp_Ctrl 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling external

tripping signal to control breaker failure initiation.

26 50BF.En_PD_Ctrl 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling pole

disagreement position of CB to control breaker

failure initiation.

27 50BF.En_52a_Ctrl 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling breaker NO

auxiliary contact to control breaker failure

initiation.

28 MR1.En_FixDly 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR1 to issue

a trip command after delay [MR1.t_FixDly].

29 MR1.En_OpDly 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR1

protection to issue a trip command after delay

[MR1.En_OpDly].

30 MR1.En_MR14CtrlMR1 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR14 to

control MR1 protection.

31 MR2.En_FixDly 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR2 to issue

a trip command after delay [MR2.t_Op].

32 MR3.En_FixDly 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR3to issue

a trip command after delay [MR3.t_Op].

33 MR4.En_FixDly 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR4 to issue

a trip command after delay [MR4.t_Op].

7.6 Logic Links

The logic link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection is in service,

when this relay is energized. Each logic iLink is an “AND” condition of enabling the relevant

protective element with the corresponding binary input and logic setting. Through SAS or

RTU, the virtual enabling binary input can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant

Page 115: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-9

Date: 2013-05-17

protection can be in service or out of service through remote command. It provides convenience

for operation management.

Setting List

Table 7.6-1 Function logic link list

No. Symbol Range Step Explanation

1 Link_RmtChgSetting 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic link of enabling/disabling changing settings

remotely.

2 Link_RmtCtrlLink 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic link of enabling/disabling changing VEBI

settings remotely.

3 Link_RmtChgGrp 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic link of enabling/disabling changing current

active group remotely.

4 Link_En62PD 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic link of enabling/disabling pole disagreement

protection.

5 Link_En50BF 0: disable

1: enable 1 Logic link of enabling breaker failure initiation.

6 Link_EnDlyMR 0: disable

1: enable 1

Logic link of enabling/disabling mechanical

protection tripping with time delay.

Setting Path

Main Menu -> Settings -> Logic Links->Function Links

7.7 Label Settings

These label settings are used to define MR signal to a specific MR name used on site. After new

definition of MR is applied, then MR signal will be display in specific MR name in printed report and

signals to SAS or RTU, but there are no changes for MR item in local LCD display.

The following label settings are used to define a MR sinal as a specific MR signal according to

user requirements.

Table 7.7-1 Label setting list of MR

No. Symbol Range Description

1 Name_MR1A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR1.

2 Name_MR2A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR2.

3 Name_MR3A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR3.

4 Name_MR4A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR4.

5 Name_MR5A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR5.

6 Name_MR6A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR6.

7 Name_MR7A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR7.

8 Name_MR8A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR8.

9 Name_MR9A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR9.

Page 116: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-10

Date: 2013-05-17

No. Symbol Range Description

10 Name_MR10A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR10.

11 Name_MR11A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR11.

12 Name_MR12A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR12.

13 Name_MR13A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR13.

14 Name_MR14A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR14.

15 Name_MR15A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR15.

16 Name_MR16A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR16.

17 Name_MR17A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR17.

18 Name_MR18A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR18.

19 Name_MR19A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR19.

20 Name_MR20A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR20.

21 Name_MR1B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR1.

22 Name_MR2B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR2.

23 Name_MR3B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR3.

24 Name_MR4B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR4.

25 Name_MR5B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR5.

26 Name_MR6B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR6.

27 Name_MR7B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR7.

28 Name_MR8B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR8.

29 Name_MR9B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR9.

30 Name_MR10B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR10.

31 Name_MR11B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR11.

32 Name_MR12B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR12.

33 Name_MR13B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR13.

34 Name_MR14B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR14.

35 Name_MR15B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR15.

36 Name_MR16B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B signal of MR16.

37 Name_MR17B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR17.

38 Name_MR18B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR18.

39 Name_MR19B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR19.

40 Name_MR20B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR20.

41 Name_MR1C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR1.

42 Name_MR2C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR2.

43 Name_MR3C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR3.

44 Name_MR4C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR4.

45 Name_MR5C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR5.

46 Name_MR6C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR6.

47 Name_MR7C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR7.

48 Name_MR8C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR8.

49 Name_MR9C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR9.

50 Name_MR10C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR10.

51 Name_MR11C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR11.

Page 117: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-11

Date: 2013-05-17

No. Symbol Range Description

52 Name_MR12C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR12.

53 Name_MR13C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR13.

54 Name_MR14C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR14.

55 Name_MR15C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR15.

56 Name_MR16C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR16.

57 Name_MR17C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR17.

58 Name_MR18C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR18.

59 Name_MR19C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR19.

60 Name_MR20C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR20.

61 Name_Op_DlyMR1 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR1 with time delay

62 Name_Op_DlyMR2 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR2 with time delay

63 Name_Op_DlyMR3 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR3 with time delay

64 Name_Op_DlyMR4 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR4 with time delay

For example, Once “OilTemp_A” is defined for [Name_MR6A], when phase A of MR6 mechancial

protection operates with time delay, then binary input change report [BI_PhA_OilTemp] will be sent

to SAS or RTU. If the corresponding report is printed, then [BI_PhA_OilTemp] in report will replace

[BI_PhA_MR06].

Setting Path

Main Menu -> Settings -> Device Setup->Label Settings

Page 118: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

7 Settings

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-12

Date: 2013-05-17

Page 119: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-a Date: 2013-05-17

8 Human Machine Interface

Table of Contents

8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Keypad Operation ............................................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.2 LED Indications .................................................................................................................. 8-4

8.1.3 Front Communication Port .................................................................................................. 8-4

8.1.4 Ethernet Pot Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-5

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-6

8.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 8-6

8.2.2 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 8-9

8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................ 8-10

8.2.4 Records ............................................................................................................................ 8-11

8.2.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-11

8.2.6 Print .................................................................................................................................. 8-12

8.2.7 Local Cmd ........................................................................................................................ 8-14

8.2.8 Information ........................................................................................................................ 8-14

8.2.9 Test ................................................................................................................................... 8-14

8.2.10 Clock ............................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.2.11 Language ........................................................................................................................ 8-15

8.3 Understand the LCD Display ........................................................................ 8-15

8.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-15

8.3.3 Display When Tripping ...................................................................................................... 8-16

8.3.4 Display under Abnormal Condition ................................................................................... 8-19

8.3.5 Display When Binary State Changes ................................................................................ 8-20

8.3.6 Display Device Logs ......................................................................................................... 8-22

8.4 Keypad Operation .......................................................................................... 8-23

Page 120: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-b Date: 2013-05-17

8.4.1 View Device Analog .......................................................................................................... 8-23

8.4.2 View Device Status ........................................................................................................... 8-23

8.4.3 View Device Records ........................................................................................................ 8-23

8.4.4 Print Device Records ........................................................................................................ 8-24

8.4.5 View Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-25

8.4.6 Modify Device Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25

8.4.7 Copy Device Setting ......................................................................................................... 8-28

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ........................................................................................................ 8-29

8.4.9 Delete Records ................................................................................................................. 8-30

8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ....................................................................................................... 8-31

8.4.11 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-32

8.4.12 View Module Information ................................................................................................ 8-32

8.4.13 Communication Test ....................................................................................................... 8-33

8.4.14 Select Language ............................................................................................................. 8-34

List of Figures

Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of PCS-974FG ................................................................................... 8-2

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel ................................................................... 8-3

Figure 8.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications ................................................................. 8-4

Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel.................................. 8-5

Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C .................................................. 8-6

Figure 8.2-1 Tree diagram of total command menu ................................................................ 8-9

Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram ................................................................... 8-16

Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ............................................................................... 8-17

Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report .................................................. 8-19

Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ............................................................................... 8-19

Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary change report ........................................................................ 8-20

Figure 8.3-6 Display of device logs ........................................................................................ 8-22

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password .......................................................................... 8-26

Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings ......................................................................... 8-27

Page 121: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-c Date: 2013-05-17

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings ......................................................................... 8-28

Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings .................................................................................... 8-29

Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group ................................................................... 8-30

Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report .................................................................................. 8-31

Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................ 8-32

Figure 8.4-8 Display of communication test .......................................................................... 8-33

Figure 8.4-9 Display of selecting language ........................................................................... 8-34

List of Tables

Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................ 8-5

Table 8.2-1 Measurements of device ..................................................................................... 8-10

Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages ................................................................................... 8-17

Table 8.3-2 Contact inputs list ................................................................................................ 8-20

Table 8.3-3 Mechanical signal inputs list............................................................................... 8-21

Table 8.3-4 Device logs list ..................................................................................................... 8-23

Page 122: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-d Date: 2013-05-17

Page 123: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-1 Date: 2013-05-17

The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the

protective device is possible using a computer via a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel.

Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation

system via rear RS485 port or rear Ethernet port. The operator is able to check the protective

device status at any time.

This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator an instruction about

how to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering

value, including RMS current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. Procedures to change

active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad are also described in details.

NOTE!

About two measurement items in menu “Measurements”, please refer to the following

description:

“Measurement1” is used to display measured values for protection calculation.

“Measurement2” is used to display measured values for fault detector calculation.

8.1 Overview

The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows

a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your

attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the

LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.

Page 124: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-2 Date: 2013-05-17

PCS-974

TRANSFORMER AUXILIARY RELAY

GR

P

ENT

ES

C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

HEALTHY

ALARM

TRIP

2

1

3

4

5

Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of PCS-974FG

The function of HMI module:

No. Item Description

1 LCD

A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting

conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is

operation implemented.

2 LED 20 status indication LEDs, first three LEDs are fixed as the signals of

“HEALTHY” , “ALARM” and “TRIP”, others are configurable.

3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device

4 Communication port a multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of device

Page 125: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-3 Date: 2013-05-17

8.1.1 Keypad Operation

ENT

GR

P

-ES

C

+

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel

1. “ESC”:

Cancel the operation

Quit the current menu

2. “ENT”:

Execute the operation

Confirm the interface

3. “GRP”

Activate the switching interface of setting group

4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):

Move the cursor horizontally

Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu

5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)

Move the cursor vertically

Select command menu within the same level of menu

6. plus and minus sign keys (“+” and “-”)

Modify the value

Modify and display the message number

Page up/down

NOTE!

Any setting change shall be confirmed by simply pressing “+”, “”, “”, “-“, “ENT” in

sequence.

Page 126: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-4 Date: 2013-05-17

Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.

8.1.2 LED Indications

HEALTHY

ALARM

TRIP

Figure 8.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications

A brief explanation has been made as bellow.

LED Display Description

HEALTHY

Off When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is

detected during self-check.

Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.

ALARM

Off When equipment in normal operating condition.

Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm

is issued.

TRIP

Off when the equipment is in normal operating condition

Red Lit when any protection element trips.

NOTE!

The LED “HEALTHY” can only be lit by supplying DC to equipment without alarms

blocking equipment.

The LED “ALARM” can be lit when there is some abnormality such as CT circuit

abnormality, pickup of breaker failure initiation, and when equipment returns to

normal operating state, the LED can go off automatically. Mechanical protection

which is not controlled by DSP module operates with only “ALARM” LED being lit.

The “TRIP” LED is turned on and latched once any protection element controlled by

DSP module of device operates and. The “TRIP” LED can be turned off by pressing

the signal RESET button on the front panel.

8.1.3 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port

as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is

applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.

Page 127: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-5 Date: 2013-05-17

Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

In the above figure and the following table:

P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.

P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.

P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.

The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.

Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable

Pin No. Core color Function Device side

(Left)

Computer side

(Right)

1 Orange TX+ of the Ethernet port P1-1 P2-1

2 Orange & white TX- of the Ethernet port P1-2 P2-2

3 Green & white RX+ of the Ethernet port P1-3 P2-3

4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2

5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3

6 Green RX- for the Ethernet port P1-6 P2-6

7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P1-7 P3-5

8.1.4 Ethernet Pot Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C

as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5.

The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)

after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the

instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC

must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet

interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Communication Settings”, it should be

ensured that the protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting

the IP address and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)

PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”

The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,

Page 128: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-6 Date: 2013-05-17

[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)

If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.

NR1102C

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

SYN+

SYN-

SGND

RTS

TXD

SGND

Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

NOTE! If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2]

must be set as “1”.

8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview

Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and

“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous

menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For sake of executing the command menu

again, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Five latest

menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. When the five menu commands are

recorded, the latest menu command will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out”

principle. It is arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command

menus. Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Page 129: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-7 Date: 2013-05-17

Quick Menu

Language

Reset Target

Device Settings

Mainmenu

For the first powered protective device, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲” to enter the

main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Page 130: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-8 Date: 2013-05-17

Test

Local Cmd

Print

Settings

Records

Measurements

Status

Information

Clock

Language

Page 131: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-9 Date: 2013-05-17

MAIN MENU

Device Test

Internal Signal

Measurements

Measurements 1

Status

Primary Values

Inputs

Local Cmd

Reset Target

Trig Oscillograph

Download

Contact Inputs

Superv State

Information

Version Info

Board Info

Clock

Test

Measurements 2

Protection Elements

Superv Events

IO EventsRecords

Disturb Records

Superv Events

IO Events

Device Logs

Clear Records

Print

Settings

Device Info

Prot Settings

Prot Settings

System Settings

Latest Chgd Settings

All Settings

Function Links

Logic Links

Device Setup

Device Settings

Communication Settings

Label Settings

LanguageSettings

Prot Settings

Prot Settings

System Settings

Primary Values

Prot Superv

FD Superv

Function Links

Logic Links

Device Setup

Device Settings

Communication Settings

Label Settings

Copy Settings

Waveforms

IEC103 Info

Rec Wave

Disturb Records

Superv Events

IO Events

Device Status

Cancle Print

Device Logs

Figure 8.2-1 Tree diagram of total command menu

Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,

“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram

provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.

NOTE! The menu shown in above figure is not the specific-application menu. For each

project, the menu varies with the protection configuration.

8.2.2 Measurement

This menu is mainly used to display the real time sampling value of current, voltage and phase

Page 132: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-10 Date: 2013-05-17

angle. This menu and “Status” menu can fully reflects of the running environment of the protection

device. As long as the displayed values consist with the actual running situation, basically, the

protection device can work normally. This menu is set to greatly facilitate the debugging and

maintenance of people on site.

The menu “Measurements” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Measurement 1 Display sampled and calculated values for protection calculation.

2 Measurement 2 Display sampled and calculated values for fault detector calculation.

8.2.2.1 Measurements1

The menu “Measurement1” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Primary Values Display measured values and phase angles for protection calculation.

8.2.2.2 Measurements2

The menu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Primary values Display measured values and phase angles for fault detector

calculation.

Measurement values are listed in the following table.

Table 8.2-1 Measurements of device

No. Symbol Definition Unit

1 Ia The phase A current. A

2 Ib The phase B current. A

3 Ic The phase C current. A

4 3I0Cal The calculated residual current. A

5 I1 The positive-sequence current. A

6 I2 The negative-sequence current. A

7 Ang(Ia-Ib) The angle between phase A and phase B currents. °

8 Ang(Ib-Ic) The angle between phase B and phase C currents. °

9 Ang(Ic-Ia) The angle between phase C and phase A currents. °

8.2.3 Status

This menu is mainly used to display the state of binary inputs (including binary inputs via

opto-coupler and GOOSE binary inputs) and alarm signals in the protection device. This menu and

“Measurements” menu fully reflects the running environment of the protection device. As long as

the displayed values consist with the actual running situation, basically, the protection device can

work normally. This menu is set to greatly facilitate the debugging and maintenance of people on

Page 133: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-11 Date: 2013-05-17

site.

The menu “Status” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Inputs Display all input signal states.

2 Outputs Display all output signal states.

3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states.

8.2.3.1 Inputs

The menu “Inputs” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary input derived from opto-isolated channels

8.2.3.2 Outputs

The menu “Outputs” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Contact Outputs Display states of binary output derived from opto-isolated channels

8.2.4 Records

This menu is used for displaying all kinds of records, so that the operator can load to view and use

as the reference of analyzing accidents and maintaining the device. All the records are stored in

non-volatile memory, and it can still record the reports even if it loses its power.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Disturb Records Display trip records.

2 Superv Events Display self-check alarm and equipment operation abnormal alarm

reports.

3 IO Events Display binary events.

4 Device Logs Display running and operation reports of protective device.

5 Clear Records Clear all records.

8.2.5 Settings

This menu is used for checking the setting of device equipment parameter, protection setting, logic

setting and system parameter, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it

can also execute the setting copy between different setting groups.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 System Settings To display and modify the system settings.

2 Prot Settings To display and modify the protection settings

Page 134: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-12 Date: 2013-05-17

No. Item Function description

3 Logic Links To display and modify the logic links.

4 Device Setup To display and modify the settings related to device setup.

5 Copy Settings To copy settings from one group to another group.

8.2.5.1 Prot Settings

The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Prot Settings To display and modify all protection settings of device.

8.2.5.2 Logic Links

The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Function Links To display and modify the function logic links of protection element.

8.2.5.3 Device Setup

The menu “Device Setup” has following submenus.

No. Item Function description

1 Device Settings To display and modify the device settings.

2 Communication Settings To display and modify the communication settings.

3 Label Settings To display and modify the label settings of protective device.

8.2.6 Print

This menu is used for printing device description, setting, all kinds of records, waveform and

information related with 103 Protocol.

This menu includes the following command menus and submenus.

No. Item Function description

1 Device Info To print the description information of protective device including

software version.

2 Settings

To print settings, including communication parameter, protection

setting, logic links and device setup. It can print by different

classifications as well as printing all settings of the device. Besides, it

can also print out the latest modified setting item.

3 Disturb Records To print trip reports.

4 Superv Events To print status change of binary signal.

5 IO Events To print self-check alarm and equipment operation abnormal alarm

reports.

Page 135: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-13 Date: 2013-05-17

No. Item Function description

6 Device Logs To print running and operation reports of protective device.

7 Device Status To print present status of device, including measurement, signal

status, settings, etc.

8 Waveforms To print recorded waveforms.

9 IEC103 Info

To print 103 protocol information, including function type (FUN),

information serial number (INF), general classification service group

number and channel number (ACC).

8.2.6.1 Settings

The menu “Settings” has following submenus.

No. Item Function description

1 System Settings To print the system settings.

2 Prot Settings To print the protection settings

3 Logic Links To print the logic links.

4 Device Setup To print the settings related to device setup.

5 All Settings To print all settings.

6 Latest Modified To print latest modified settings.

(1) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Prot Settings To print all protection settings of device.

(2) The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Function Links To print the function logic links of protection element.

(3) The menu “Device Setup” has following submenus.

No. Item Function description

1 Device Settings To print the equipment settings including GOOSE module settings.

2 Communication Settings To print the communication settings.

3 Label Settings To print label settings of protective device.

8.2.6.2 Waveforms

The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus.

No. Item Description

1 Rec Wave To print current waveforms.

Page 136: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-14 Date: 2013-05-17

8.2.7 Local Cmd

This menu is used for resetting the tripping relay with latch, protection device signal lamp, LCD

display, as the same as the resetting function of binary input. Record the currently acquired

waveform data of the protection device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.

Besides, it can send out the request of program download.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.

2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording.

3 Download Send out the download request.

8.2.8 Information

In this menu the LCD displays software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,

which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence

number. Besides, hardware board information can also be viewed.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Version Info Display software version information of the equipment.

2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each board of the equipment

8.2.9 Test

This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain

device. It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the

communication test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the

SAS without any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 Device Test Execute device tests.

2 Internal Signal Display internal signals of device.

The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus. Users can respectively execute the test

automatically or manually by selecting commands “All Test” or “Select Test”.

No. Item Function description

3 Protection Elements Generate messages of protection element to transmit to SCADA.

4 Superv Events Generate alarm messages to transmit to SCADA.

5 IO Events Generate binary events to transmit to SCADA.

Page 137: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-15 Date: 2013-05-17

8.2.10 Clock

The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form

YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.

8.2.11 Language

This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.

8.3 Understand the LCD Display

8.3.1 Overview

There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm

reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will

not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the RESET button in the

protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both “ENT” and

“ESC” at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.

Binary change reports will be displayed for 5s and then it’ll return to the previous display interface

automatically. Control reports will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the

corresponding menu.

8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation

After the protection device is powered and turns into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to

complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the

“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device goes out.

Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color

as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished

automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

When the equipment is powered on, based on actual connection of the transformer, the LCD will

display single line diagram on its connection diagrams. If the transformer has three windings and 2

branches on LV side, the LCD will display by configuring the logic settings.

Page 138: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-16 Date: 2013-05-17

Communication address

Current values

Mechanical signal state

Active group numberAddr:102

Data and time of equipment clock

2011-07-09 10:27:24 Group 01

Ia: 1.000A Ib: 1.000A Ic: 1.000A

MR_A1

MR_A2

: 0

: 0

MR_A3 : 0

MR_A4 : 0

MR_A5

MR_A6

: 0

: 0

MR_A7 : 0

MR_A8 : 0

MR Input Signal A

MR_A9 : 0

MR_A10 : 0

MR_A11

MR_A12

: 0

: 0

MR_A13 : 0

MR_A14 : 0

MR_A15

MR_A16

: 0

: 0

MR_A17 : 0

MR_A18 : 0

MR_A19 : 0

MR_A20 : 0

Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram

The displayed content of the interface contains: the current date and time of the protection device

(with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the currently valid setting group number, the three-phase

current and voltage sampled values of each side, differential current, residual differential current,

frequency etc.

8.3.3 Display When Tripping

This protection device can store 64 fault reports and 64 fault waveforms. When there is protection

element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report, and two kinds of LCD

display will be available depending on whether there is self-check report at present.

If the device has no self-check report, the display interface will only show the fault report.

Page 139: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-17 Date: 2013-05-17

. Distub Records NO.2

2011-11-28 07:10:00:200

24000ms 62PD.Op_t1

00000ms TrigDFR

Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report

Disturb Records NO.2 shows the title and SOE number of the report.

2011-11-28 07:10:00:200 shows the time when fault detector picks up, the format is

year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond.

0000ms TrigDFR shows fault detector of protection element and operation time of fault

detector is fixed as 0ms.

2400ms 62PD.Op_t1 shows the relative operation time and operation element of protection

element

Operation report messages are all liseted showed in the following table.

Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages

No. Message Description

1 ManTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered manually.

2 RmtTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered remotely.

3 TrigDFR Fault detector operates to trigger oscillography.

4 ProtBrd.AlmTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered by alarm signals on

protection board.

5 ProtBrd.FailTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered by failure signals on

protection board.

6 62PD.Op_t1 Delay 1 of pole disagreement protection operates

7 62PD.Op_t2 Delay 2 of pole disagreement protection operates

Page 140: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-18 Date: 2013-05-17

No. Message Description

8 62PD.TrigDFR_t1 Delay 1 of pole disagreement protection picks up to trigger

trigger FDR function.

9 62PD.TrigDFR_t2 Delay 2 of pole disagreement protection picks up to trigger

trigger FDR function.

10 50BF.Op_t1 Delay 1 of breaker failure initation operates.

11 50BF.Op_t2 Delay 2 of breaker failure initiation operates.

12 Op_DlyMR1 MR1 mechanical protection operates with time delay.

13 Op_DlyMR2 MR2 mechanical protection operates with time delay.

14 Op_DlyMR3 MR3 mechanical protection operates with time delay.

15 Op_DlyMR4 MR4 mechanical protection operates with time delay.

16 TrpOut_62PD_t1 Tripping output of delay 1 of pole disagreement protection

operation.

17 TrpOut_62PD_t2 Tripping output of delay 2 of pole disagreement protection

operation.

18 TrpOut_50BF_t1 Tripping output of delay 1 of breaker failure initiation operation.

19 TrpOut_50BF_t1 Tripping output of delay 2 of breaker failure initiation operation.

20 Trpout_DlyMR1 Tripping output os MR1 mechanical protection operation.

21 Trpout_DlyMR2 Tripping output os MR2 mechanical protection operation.

22 Trpout_DlyMR3 Tripping output os MR3 mechanical protection operation.

23 Trpout_DlyMR4 Tripping output os MR4 mechanical protection operation.

For the situation that the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously in the

following figure, the upper half part is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. As to

the upper half part, it displays separately the record number of fault report, fault name, generating

time of fault report (with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), protection element and tripping element.

If there is protection element, there is relative time on the basis of fault detector element and fault

phase. At the same time, if the total lines of protection element and tripping element are more than

3, a scroll bar will appear at the right. The height of the black part of the scroll bar basically

indicates the total lines of protection element and tripping element, and its position suggests the

position of the currently displayed line in the total lines. The scroll bar of protection element and

tripping element will roll up at the speed of one line per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it’ll

roll from the earliest protection element and tripping element again. The displayed content of the

lower half part is similar to that of the upper half part.

Page 141: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-19 Date: 2013-05-17

Alm_OptoDC

NO.010 2011-11-28 10:10:00 Trip

Alarm Infor

24000ms 62PD.Op_t1

00000ms TrigDFR

Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report

8.3.4 Display under Abnormal Condition

This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,

the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed

immediately.

Superv Events NO.4

2008-12-29 9:18:47:500ms

Alm_OptoDC 0 1

Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report

Superv Events NO.4 shows the SOE number and title of the report

Page 142: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-20 Date: 2013-05-17

2011-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the data and time of the report occurred: year–month-date

and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Alm_OptoDC 0->1 shows the content of abnormality alarm

All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.

8.3.5 Display When Binary State Changes

When a binary input is energized or de-energized, output contacts operate, the corresponding IO

event report will be automatically displayed on LCD as follows. This protective equipment can

store 1024 events of binary signals. During the running of the equipment, the binary signals will be

displayed once the input signal state changes.

IO_Events NO.4

2008-11-29 09:18:47:500ms

BI_RstTarg 0 1

Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary change report

No.004 Binary Events shows the number and title of the report

2008-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is

year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

BI_RstTarg 0->1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input

name, original state and final state

Contact inputs and contact outputs are listed in the following two tables, and user can define

undefined binary inputs as the specific binary inputs via PCS-Explorer software.

Table 8.3-2 Contact inputs list

No. Binary input Description

1 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse

2 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing

Page 143: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-21 Date: 2013-05-17

No. Binary input Description

3 BI_Maintenance Binary input of indicating the protection device is under maintenance state

4 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment

5 BI_En62PD Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection

6 BI_En50BF Binary input of enabling breaker failure initiation

7 BI_EnDlyMR Binary input of enabling MR protection with time delay

8 BI_EnRmtCtrl Binary input of enabling remote control function

9 BI_09 Configurable binary input 09, not used

10 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10, not used

11 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11, not used

12 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12, not used

13 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13, not used

14 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14, not used

15 BI_15 Configurable binary input 15, not used

16 BI_16 Configurable binary input 16, not used

17 BI_17 Configurable binary input 17, not used

18 BI_18 Configurable binary input 18, not used

19 BI_16 Configurable binary input 19, not used

20 BI_20 Configurable binary input 20, not used

21 BI_21 Configurable binary input 20, not used

22 BI_ExTCtrlPD2 Binary input of tripping signal for controlling delay 2 of pole disagreement

23 BI_ExTCtrlBFI Binary input of tripping signal for controlling breaker failure initiation

24 BI_52a Binary input of auxiliary NO contact of circuit breaker

25 BI_PD Binary input of pole disagreement of circuit breaker

Table 8.3-3 Mechanical signal inputs list

No. Binary input Description

1 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR01 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.

2 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR02 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.

3 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR03 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.

4 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR04 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.

5 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR05 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.

6 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR06 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.

7 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR07 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.

8 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR08 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.

9 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR09 Phase A (B,C)input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.

10 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR10 Phase A (B,C)input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.

11 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR11 Phase A (B,C)input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.

12 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR12 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.

13 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR13 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR13 mechanical relay.

Page 144: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-22 Date: 2013-05-17

No. Binary input Description

14 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR14 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR14 mechanical relay.

15 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR15 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR15 mechanical relay.

16 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR16 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR16 mechanical relay.

17 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR17 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.

18 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR18 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.

19 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR19 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.

20 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR20 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.

NOTE! Names of above mechanical input signals can be defined by users via setting

[Name_MRxx] in the menu “Settings->Device Settings->Label Settings”.

8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This protection device can store 1024 pieces of equipment logs. During the running of the

protection device, equipment logs will be displayed after user operations.

Device Logs NO.4

Device_Reboot

2011-11-28 10:18:47:569ms

Figure 8.3-6 Display of device logs

Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the report

2011-11-28 10:18:47:569 shows the date and time when the report occurred, the format is

year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Device_Reboot shows the state content of the user operation report.

User operating information listed below may be displayed.

Page 145: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-23 Date: 2013-05-17

Table 8.3-4 Device logs list

No. Message Description

1 Device_Reboot The protective equipment has been rebooted.

2 Settings_Chgd The settings of protective equipment have been changed.

3 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.

4 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (Device log events can not be deleted.)

5 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.

6 SubProcess_Exit A subprocess has exited.

8.4 Keypad Operation

8.4.1 View Device Analog

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then

press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press

the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one

display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).

8.4.2 View Device Status

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the

“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press

the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one

display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).

8.4.3 View Device Records

The operation is as follows:

Page 146: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-24 Date: 2013-05-17

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the

key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the

key “ENT” to enter the submenu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record.

6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

7. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).

8.4.4 Print Device Records

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the

“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the

“ENT” to enter the menu.

Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then

Press the “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,

the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu

(returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task

and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key

“ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the

key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “+” or “-” to select the starting and

ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will

display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the

menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

4. If selecting the command menu “Device Info”, “Status“ or “IEC103 Info”, press the key

“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu

(returning to the menu “Print”).

5. If selecting the “Settings”, “Logic Links”, press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the next

level of menu.

6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and

then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to

printing:

Page 147: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-25 Date: 2013-05-17

Press the key “+” or “-” to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key

“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu

(returning to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the

menu “Settings”).

7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “+” or “-” to select the waveform

item to be printed and press “ENT” to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will

display “No Waveform Data!” (Before executing the command menu “HVS Wave”, it is

necessary to execute the command menu “Trig Oscillograph” in the menu “Local Cmd”,

otherwise the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”). With waveform data existing:

Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,

the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to

the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and

re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to

exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”).

8.4.5 View Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the

key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the

key “ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

NOTE! If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right

side of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu

and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

8.4.6 Modify Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press

the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press

the key “ENT” to enter the menu.

Page 148: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-26 Date: 2013-05-17

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.

5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).

8. If selecting the command menu “Device Settings” or “Communication Settings”,

move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ENT”.

Press the key “+” or “-” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press

the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “+” or “-” to

modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the

displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to

automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu

“Device Settings”).

Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are

modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”.

Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the

“Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the

displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”).

Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all

modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the

menu “Settings”).

Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key

“ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.

Please Input Password:

----

Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password

Page 149: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-27 Date: 2013-05-17

Input a 4-bit password (“+”, “◄”, “▲” or “-”). If the password is incorrect, continue

inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to

the displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”. If the password is

correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the

displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”), with all modified setting

items as modified values.

NOTE! For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their

modification methods are the same.

NOTE! After modifying the parameter settings of equipment i.e. settings in menu “Device

Settings” or “Communication Settings”, the “HEALTHY” indicator of the protection

device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and re-check the

protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked.

9. If selecting the command menu of protection element or tripping matrix such as “Prot

Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface:

1. 62PD.3I0_Set

Group NO select

Group NO To be edited 02

Current Group NO: 01

Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings

Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. If the setting

[87.I_Biased] is selected to modify, then press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display

the following interface. is shown the “+” or “-” to modify the value and then press the

“ENT” to enter.

Page 150: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-28 Date: 2013-05-17

62PD.3I0_Set

Modified Value

Current Value

Min Value

8.000

0.040

Max Value 150

8.000

Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings

10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then

press the “ENT”.

8.4.7 Copy Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the

key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”,

and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on

LCD.

Page 151: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-29 Date: 2013-05-17

Copy Settings

Active Group: 01

Copy To Group: 02

Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings

Press the key “+” or “-” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the

menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input,

if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the

password input interface and return to the menu “Settings”. If the password is correct,

the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu

“Settings”).

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group

The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu.

2. Press the “GRP”.

Page 152: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-30 Date: 2013-05-17

Change Active Group

Active Group: 01

Change To Group: 02

Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group

Press the “+” or “-” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu

(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password

input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to

exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the

“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check

the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check

is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.

8.4.9 Delete Records

The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu.

2. Press the “+”, “-”, “+”, “-” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu

(returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.

Page 153: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-31 Date: 2013-05-17

Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit

Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report

NOTE! The operation of deleting device records will delete all messages saved by the

protection device, including disturbance records, supervision events and binary events,

but the user operation reports (i.e. equipment logs) can not be deleted. Furthermore, all

deleted records are irrecoverable after deletion, so the function shall be used with great

cautious.

8.4.10 Modify Device Clock

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key

“ENT” to enter clock display.

Page 154: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-32 Date: 2013-05-17

Clock

Month

Year

Day

11

2008

28

Hour 20

Minute

Second

59

14

Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.

4. Press the key “+” or “-”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the

modification and return to the main menu.

5. Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

8.4.11 Check Software Version

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press

the “ENT” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and

then press the key “ENT” to display the software version.

4. Press the key “ESC” to return to the main menu.

8.4.12 View Module Information

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press

the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and

then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.

Page 155: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-33 Date: 2013-05-17

5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).

8.4.13 Communication Test

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key

“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Comm Test”, and

then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu, to select test item. If “Prot Elements”

“Superv Events” or “IO Events” is selected, the LCD will display “Entering

Communication Test…”.

Operation Eelment

Select Test

All Test

Figure 8.4-8 Display of communication test

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu

“All Test” or “Select Test”. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will

successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.

5. If selecting the “Select Test”, users will go to an interface, then select the “+” or “-” to

page up/down to select each operation element and press the key “ENT” to execute the

test.

NOTE! If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission

and return to the “Test” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test

Timeout and Exiting...”.

6. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Test”, at this moment, the

LCD will display “Communication Test Exiting…”.

Page 156: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-34 Date: 2013-05-17

8.4.14 Select Language

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Language”, and

then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on

LCD.

Please Select Language:

English

中文1

2

Figure 8.4-9 Display of selecting language

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press

the key “ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD

will return to the menu “Language”, and the display language is changed. Otherwise,

press the key “ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the menu “Language”.

NOTE! The LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for

explaining specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual protection

device may be some different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection

device.

Page 157: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-a Date: 2013-05-17

9 Communication

Table of Contents

9.1 General Description......................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 Rear Communication Port Information .......................................................... 9-1

9.2.1 RS-485 Interface ................................................................................................................ 9-1

9.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................... 9-3

9.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ....................................................................................... 9-4

9.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ..................................................... 9-4

9.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ................................................................................... 9-5

9.3.2 Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.3.3 Time Synchronization ......................................................................................................... 9-5

9.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................... 9-5

9.3.5 General Interrogation .......................................................................................................... 9-6

9.3.6 General Functions .............................................................................................................. 9-6

9.3.7 Disturbance Records .......................................................................................................... 9-7

9.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet ........................................................ 9-7

9.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol ............................................... 9-7

9.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 9-7

9.5.2 Communication Profiles ...................................................................................................... 9-8

9.5.3 Server Data Organization ................................................................................................... 9-9

9.5.4 Server Features and Configuration ................................................................................... 9-11

9.5.5 ACSI conformance ............................................................................................................ 9-12

9.5.6 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................... 9-17

9.6 DNP3.0 Interface ............................................................................................ 9-20

9.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 9-20

9.6.2 Link Layer Functions......................................................................................................... 9-20

9.6.3 Transport Functions .......................................................................................................... 9-20

Page 158: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-b Date: 2013-05-17

9.6.4 Application Layer Functions .............................................................................................. 9-20

List of Figures

Figure 9.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ........................................................ 9-2

Figure 9.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................... 9-3

Figure 9.2-3 Ethernet communication structure ..................................................................... 9-4

List of Tables

Table 9.3-1 Generic service group numbers ........................................................................... 9-6

Table 9.3-2 Disturbance ACC numbers ................................................................................... 9-7

Page 159: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-1 Date: 2013-05-17

9.1 General Description

This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR equipment. The protective

device supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or

Ethernet), selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective

device is indicated in the submenu in the “Communication Settings” column. Using the keypad

and LCD, set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and [Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding

protocol will be selected.

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever

protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices

can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.

It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the

protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this

information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

9.2 Rear Communication Port Information

9.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three

terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a

ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. Please refer to the section of

“Communication Interface module” for details of the connection terminals. The rear ports provide

RS-485 serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection

to a remote control center.

9.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the

product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the

polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed

definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and

the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.

9.2.1.2 Bus Termination

The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end

across the signal wires (refer to Figure 9.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus

terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case

separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a

facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

Page 160: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-2 Date: 2013-05-17

Master

Slave Slave Slave

EIA

RS

-48

5

120 Ohm

120 Ohm

Figure 9.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

9.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that

is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop

bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.

Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the

application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length

must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,

normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially

when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.

This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present

in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other

devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables

screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.

9.2.1.4 Biasing

It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal

level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when

all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit

mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high

impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss

the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message

and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),

increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to

communicate.

Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There

should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.

The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some

devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will

not be required.

Page 161: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-3 Date: 2013-05-17

NOTE!

It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so

will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the

bus.

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume

responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as

a result of incorrect application of this voltage.

Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic

inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

9.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached

each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Communication

Settings”.

9.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture

is shown bellow.

Figure 9.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

9.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star

structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also

connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment which

has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.

Page 162: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-4 Date: 2013-05-17

SCADA

Ethernet Switch A

Ethernet Switch B

Equipment Equipment Equipment

Figure 9.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

9.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission

Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform

communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103

protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports

to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to

commands from a master station.

To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective

device must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu

“Communication Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B],

[Baud_RS485A] and [Baud_RS485B]. For using the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103

communication, the IP address and submask of each Ethernet port can be set in the same

submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in Chapter “Settings” for further details.

9.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the

protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NR.

The protective device conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (reset)

Time synchronization

Event record extraction

General interrogation

General functions

Page 163: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-5 Date: 2013-05-17

Disturbance records

9.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.

The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.

The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

9.3.2 Initialization

Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have

been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective

device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference

is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.

The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,

the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB

depending on the nature of the reset command.

9.3.3 Time Synchronization

The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the

IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified

in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then

the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message

is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization

class 1 event will be generated/produced.

If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to

set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via

the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time

taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.

9.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:

Type identification (TYP)

Function type (FUN)

Information number (INF)

Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and

status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of

transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.

1. Operation elements sent by ASDU2

2. Alarm element sent by ASDU1

Page 164: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-6 Date: 2013-05-17

3. Binary input sent by ASDU1

Please print the IEC103 information by the menu “Print->IEC103 Info” for each specific project.

9.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers

that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the

IEC60870-5-103.

Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

9.3.6 General Functions

The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,

and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more

details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.

Table 9.3-1 Generic service group numbers

Group Number Group Caption Description

001 Equip_Description

002 Trip_Element

003 Self-check_Alarm

004 Binary_Input

005 Metering

006 System Settings

007 Prot Settings

008 Function Links

009 Device Settings

010 Comm Settings

011 Label Settings

012 Setting_Group

013 Primary_Values1

014 Primary_Values2

015 Fault_Data

016 OutMap Bit Description

017 Disturbance_Info_List

018 Disturbance_Info_List

019 Disturbance_Info_List

NOTE! The above table is only an example and it will change with the differential

Page 165: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-7 Date: 2013-05-17

protection configurations.

9.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault

detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted by using the

standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.

Table 9.3-2 Disturbance ACC numbers

ACC No. Content ACC No. Content

1 Ia 3 Ic

2 Ib

9.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave

device. It is properly developed by NR too. All the service of this relay is based on generic

functions of the IEC60870-5-103. The following table lists all the group number of this relay. And

this relay will send all the relevant information about group caption to the SAS or RTU after

establishing a successful communication link.

Please refer to Table 9.3-1 for detailed description of generic service group numbers.

9.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol

9.5.1 Overview

The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic

equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards

describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,

testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC 61850-2: Glossary

IEC 61850-3: General requirements

IEC 61850-4: System and project management

IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs

IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment -

Principles and models

IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract

Page 166: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-8 Date: 2013-05-17

communication service interface (ACSI)

IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –

Common data classes

IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –

Compatible logical node classes and data classes

IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO

9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over

serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over

ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended

that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

9.5.2 Communication Profiles

The PCS-974 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication

protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-974 series to have an IP address to establish

communications.

1. MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper

(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number

of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN

environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol

services in IEC61850-8-1.

2. Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection and communication activity

is initiated and controlled by the client. Substation computers running HMI programs or SOE

logging software are considered as IEC61850 clients. Substation equipment such as protection

relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay control units are considered as servers.

Please note that RTUs can also be considered as clients.

3. Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.

4. Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe the configuration of

substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file and a

Page 167: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-9 Date: 2013-05-17

Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single line information is stored in a System

Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation

Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files

and the SSD file.

9.5.3 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device

can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical

nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data

attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing

various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.

Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The logical node LPHD contains information

about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common information about the IED

logical device.

9.5.3.1 Digital Status Values

The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-974 series relays to provide access to digital status

points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.

The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status

points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status

values from the PCS-974 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting

features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display

screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability

reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted

to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block

(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.

9.5.3.2 Analog Values

Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering

values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data

from an IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.

MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides

data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects

are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding

unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the

following data for each source:

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

MMXU. MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

Page 168: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-10 Date: 2013-05-17

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

9.5.3.3 Protection Logical Nodes

The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-974 series relays. The specified

relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

SPRT: mechanical protection

PTOC: phase overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent and overcurrent in case of CTS

RBRF: breaker failure protection

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any

element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)

flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For the

PCS-974 series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for

the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is

reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.

9.5.3.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes

Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address

common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control

values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be

BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the

common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and

some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements

(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local

operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED

will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In

PCS-974 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical

nodes below in the IEDs:

MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands

such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and

current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power flow

supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested accuracy for

these functions has to be provided.

LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical

device.

MSQI: Positive sequence current and negative sequence current.

Page 169: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-11 Date: 2013-05-17

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or

more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively,

any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new “operate”

of PTRC.

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers

to the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System” (IEC

60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the trigger mode.

9.5.4 Server Features and Configuration

9.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting

IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured

to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status

values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The

reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an

IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the PCS-974 series

relays:

- Bit 1: Data-change

- Bit 4: Integrity

- Bit 5: General interrogation

OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the PCS-974 series relays:

- Bit 1: Sequence-number

- Bit 2: Report-time-stamp

- Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion

- Bit 4: Data-set-name

- Bit 5: Data-reference

- Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

- Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)

- Bit 8: Conf-revision

- Bit 9: Segmentation

IntgPd: Integrity period.

BufTm: Buffer time.

9.5.4.2 File Transfer

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from

Page 170: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-12 Date: 2013-05-17

a PCS-974 series relay.

9.5.4.3 Timestamps

The Universal Time Coordinated (UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data

items represents the latest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item

9.5.4.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes

IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.

The name is composed of:

A five or six-character name prefix.

A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.

Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is

recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.

9.5.4.5 GOOSE Services

IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented

Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,

Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and

priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be

given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific

VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE

publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.

The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link

settings in device.

The PCS-974 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)

communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this

dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is

configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for

implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-974 series relays.

IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be

correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the

transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the

GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

9.5.5 ACSI conformance

9.5.5.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement

Services Client Server PCS-974

Client-Server Roles

Page 171: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-13 Date: 2013-05-17

Services Client Server PCS-974

B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) - C1 Y

B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 - N

SCSMS Supported

B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y Y

B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N

B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used Y N Y

B24 SCSM: other N N N

Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

B31 Publisher side - O Y

B32 Subscriber side O - Y

Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side - O N

B42 Subscriber side O - N

Where:

C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared

O: Optional

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-974 relay

N: Currently not supported by PCS-974 relay

9.5.5.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement

Services Client Server PCS-974

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y

M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y

M3 Data C4 C4 Y

M4 Data set C5 C5 Y

M5 Substitution O O Y

M6 Setting group control O O Y

Reporting

M7 Buffered report control O O Y

M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y

M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y

M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y

Page 172: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-14 Date: 2013-05-17

Services Client Server PCS-974

M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y

M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y Y

M7-7 entryID Y Y Y

M7-8 BufTm N N N

M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y

M7-10 GI Y Y Y

M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y

M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y

M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y

M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y

M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y

M8-6 BufTm N N N

M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y

Logging

M9 Log control O O N

M9-1 IntgPd N N N

M10 Log O O N

GSE

M12 GOOSE O O Y

M13 GSSE O O N

M14 Multicast SVC O O N

M15 Unicast SVC O O N

M16 Time M M Y

M17 File transfer O O Y

Where:

C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared

C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared

C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has

been declared

C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-974 relay

Page 173: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-15 Date: 2013-05-17

N: Currently not supported by PCS-974 relay

9.5.5.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement

Service Server/Publisher PCS-974

Server

S1 ServerDirectory M Y

Application association

S2 Associate M Y

S3 Abort M Y

S4 Release M Y

Logical device

S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y

Logical node

S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y

S7 GetAllDataValues M Y

Data

S8 GetDataValues M Y

S9 SetDataValues M Y

S10 GetDataDirectory M Y

S11 GetDataDefinition M Y

Data set

S12 GetDataSetValues M Y

S13 SetDataSetValues O

S14 CreateDataSet O

S15 DeleteDataSet O

S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y

Substitution

S17 SetDataValues M Y

Setting group control

S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y

S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y

S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y

S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y

S22 GetSGValues M/O Y

S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y

Reporting

Page 174: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-16 Date: 2013-05-17

Service Server/Publisher PCS-974

Buffered report control block

S24 Report M Y

S24-1 data-change M Y

S24-2 qchg-change M Y

S24-3 data-update M Y

S25 GetBRCBValues M Y

S26 SetBRCBValues M Y

Unbuffered report control block

S27 Report M Y

S27-1 data-change M Y

S27-2 qchg-change M Y

S27-3 data-update M Y

S28 GetURCBValues M Y

S29 SetURCBValues M Y

Logging

Log control block

S30 GetLCBValues O

S31 SetLCBValues O

Log

S32 QueryLogByTime O

S33 QueryLogAfter O

S34 GetLogStatusValues O

Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE control block

S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y

S36 GetGoReference O

S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O Y

S38 GetGoCBValues M Y

S39 SetGoCBValuess M Y

Control

S51 Select O

S52 SelectWithValue M Y

S53 Cancel M Y

S54 Operate M Y

S55 Command-Termination O Y

Page 175: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-17 Date: 2013-05-17

Service Server/Publisher PCS-974

S56 TimeActivated-Operate O

File transfer

S57 GetFile M/O Y

S58 SetFile O Y

S59 DeleteFile O

S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y

Time

SNTP M Y

9.5.6 Logical Nodes

9.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table

The PCS-974 relay supports IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that

the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.

Nodes PCS-974

L: System Logical Nodes

LPHD: Physical device information YES

LLN0: Logical node zero YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions

PDIF: Differential -

PDIR: Direction comparison -

PDIS: Distance -

PDOP: Directional overpower -

PDUP: Directional underpower -

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency -

PHAR: Harmonic restraint -

PHIZ: Ground detector -

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent -

PMRI: Motor restart inhibition -

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision -

POPF: Over power factor -

PPAM: Phase angle measuring -

PSCH: Protection scheme -

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault -

PTEF: Transient earth fault -

PTOC: Time overcurrent YES

Page 176: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-18 Date: 2013-05-17

Nodes PCS-974

PTOF: Overfrequency -

PTOV: Overvoltage -

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES

PTTR: Thermal overload -

PTUC: Undercurrent -

PTUV: Undervoltage -

PUPF: Underpower factor -

PTUF: Underfrequency -

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent -

PVPH: Volts per Hz -

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed -

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue -

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary -

RDRS: Disturbance record handling -

RBRF: Breaker failure YES

RDIR: Directional element -

RFLO: Fault locator -

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking -

RREC: Autoreclosing -

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing -

C: Logical Nodes For Control

CALH: Alarm handling -

CCGR: Cooling group control -

CILO: Interlocking -

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching -

CSWI: Switch controller -

G: Logical Nodes For Generic References

GAPC: Generic automatic process control -

GGIO: Generic process I/O YES

GSAL: Generic security application -

I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving

IARC: Archiving -

IHMI: Human machine interface -

Page 177: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-19 Date: 2013-05-17

Nodes PCS-974

ITCI: Telecontrol interface -

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface -

A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control

ANCR: Neutral current regulator -

ARCO: Reactive power control -

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller -

AVCO: Voltage control -

M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement

MDIF: Differential measurements -

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics -

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic -

MMTR: Metering -

MMXN: Non phase related measurement -

MMXU: Measurement YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance YES

MSTA: Metering statistics -

S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs -

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) -

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) -

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges -

X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear

TCTR: Current transformer YES

TVTR: Voltage transformer -

Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) -

YLTC: Tap changer -

YPSH: Power shunt -

YPTR: Power transformer -

Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment

ZAXN: Auxiliary network -

ZBAT: Battery -

ZBSH: Bushing -

ZCAB: Power cable -

ZCAP: Capacitor bank -

Page 178: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-20 Date: 2013-05-17

Nodes PCS-974

ZCON: Converter -

ZGEN: Generator -

ZGIL: Gas insulated line -

ZLIN: Power overhead line -

ZMOT: Motor -

ZREA: Reactor -

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component -

ZSAR: Surge arrestor -

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter -

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component -

9.6 DNP3.0 Interface

9.6.1 Overview

The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not

described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0

implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported

in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.

The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of

the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the EIA RS-485 at the rear of this relay.

The data format is 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit.

9.6.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

9.6.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.

9.6.4 Application Layer Functions

9.6.4.1 Time Synchronization

1. Time delay measurement

Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x17 - - -

Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07

2. Read time of device

Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Page 179: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-21 Date: 2013-05-17

Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x07

Slave 0x81 0x32 0x01 0x07

3. Write time of device

Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00,0x01,0x07,0x08

Slave 0x81 - - -

9.6.4.2 Supported Writing Functions

1. Write time of device

See Section 9.6.4.1 for the details.

2. Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)

Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01

Slave 0x81 - - -

9.6.4.3 Supported Reading Functions

1. Supported qualifiers

Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08

Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08

2. Supported objects and variations

Object 1, Binary inputs

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02

The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are

transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.

Object 2, SOE

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02 0x03

If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master

qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06” or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.

Object 30, Analog inputs

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

The measurement values are transported firstly, and then the relay measurement values are

transported.

Page 180: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

9 Communication

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-22 Date: 2013-05-17

Object 40, Analog outputs

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02

The protection settings are transported in this object.

Object 50, Time Synchronization

See Section 9.6.4.1 for the details.

3. Class 0 data request

The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.

The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30” and “Object 40” (see

“Supported objects and variations” in Section 9.6.4.3).

4. Class 1 data request

The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.

The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and

variations” in Section 9.6.4.3).

5. Multiple object request

The master adopts the “Object 60” for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,

“0x02”, “0x03” and “0x04”.

The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30” and “Object

40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in Section 9.6.4.3).

Page 181: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-a

Date: 2013-05-17

10 Installation

Table of Contents

10.1 General .......................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 10-1

10.3 Checking the Shipment ................................................................................ 10-2

10.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 10-2

10.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 10-2

10.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 10-3

10.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 10-4

10.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .................................................................................................... 10-4

10.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ......................................................................................................... 10-5

10.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ................................................................................. 10-5

10.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ........................................................................... 10-6

10.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring ..................................................................................................... 10-6

10.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ............................................................................................ 10-7

Table of Figures

Figure 10.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-974FG ............................................................................. 10-3

Figure 10.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot ................. 10-4

Figure 10.7-1 Cubicle grounding system .............................................................................. 10-5

Figure 10.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay .......................................................................... 10-6

Figure 10.7-3 Ground strip and termination ......................................................................... 10-6

Figure 10.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables .................................. 10-7

Page 182: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-b Date: 2013-05-17

Page 183: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-1

Date: 2013-05-17

10.1 General

The equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.

Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the

front of the device are easily accessible.

Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of

installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.

Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly

and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in

this section.

10.2 Safety Instructions

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe

the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the

equipment.

In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering

configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules

and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.

DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched

off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.

WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.

WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.

Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.

DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect

response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.

WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of

jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic

equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when

not in the unit's housing.

The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:

Boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV

Page 184: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-2 Date: 2013-05-17

switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)

beforehand.

Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.

Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for

electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,

however, while inserting or withdrawing units.

Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in

electrostatic screened packing materials.

10.3 Checking the Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR

Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be

found.

Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,

lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or

agent.

If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing

in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the

permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Section 2.1.3.

10.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly

instructions.

A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs

provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).

10.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the

human machine interface of the equipment.

There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of

electronic boards.

Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient

conditions, such as:

1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).

2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of

Page 185: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-3

Date: 2013-05-17

high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as

far as possible.

3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.

The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically

(visibility of markings).

WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of

this relay.

10.6 Mechanical Installation

This relay is made of a single layer 8U height chassis. Following two figures show the dimensions

of this relay for reference in mounting.

(290)482.6465

10

1.6

76

.21

01

.6

35

4.8

35

6.8

+0

.4-0

10

1.6

±0.1

10

1.6

±0

.17

6.2

±0

.1

8-Ø6.8

465±0.2

451+0.4-0

Figure 10.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-974FG

Page 186: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-4 Date: 2013-05-17

NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle

for heat emission of this relay.

The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 10.2 for

the details.

Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.

Figure 10.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot

In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have

been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that

have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.

10.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

10.7.1 Grounding Guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.

There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce

spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.

All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.

On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of

other apparatus.

In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed

with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.

NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.

Page 187: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-5

Date: 2013-05-17

10.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the

ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.

Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected

surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF

interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.

NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts

of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission

of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced

interference.

Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be

effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 10.7-1).

The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically

conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.

NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials

according to the electrochemical code.

The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip

(braided copper).

Door or hinged

equipment frame

Cubicle ground

rail close to floor

Station

ground

Braided

copper strip

Conducting

connection

Figure 10.7-1 Cubicle grounding system

10.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be

connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing

Page 188: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-6 Date: 2013-05-17

is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.

There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the

ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear

panel (see Figure 10.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Figure 10.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay

10.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of

skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.

The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper

conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.

Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting

them firmly to the items to be connected.

The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and

non-corroding.

The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.

Braided

copper strip

Press/pinch fit

cable terminal

Terminal bolt

Contact surface

Figure 10.7-3 Ground strip and termination

10.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper

cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:

Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2

Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 2.5mm2

AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 2.5mm2

Page 189: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-7

Date: 2013-05-17

AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2

Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable

Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable

10.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables

A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into

a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for

further details about the pin defines of these connectors.

The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

01 02

03 04

05 06

07

09 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

2423

2221

2019

1817

08

01

Tighten

Figure 10.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this

equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will

produce a dangerously high voltage.

Page 190: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

10 Installation

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-8 Date: 2013-05-17

Page 191: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-a Date: 2013-05-17

11 Commissioning

Table of Contents

11.1 General .......................................................................................................... 11-1

11.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 11-1

11.3 Commission Tools ........................................................................................ 11-2

11.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................. 11-2

11.5 Product Checks ............................................................................................ 11-3

11.5.1 With the Relay De-energized .......................................................................................... 11-3

11.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 11-5

11.5.3 Print Fault Report ............................................................................................................ 11-7

11.5.4 On-load Checks .............................................................................................................. 11-8

Page 192: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-b Date: 2013-05-17

Page 193: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-1 Date: 2013-05-17

11.1 General

This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection

functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of

a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as

extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.

To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning

correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.

Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for

completion as required.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the

safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

11.2 Safety Instructions

WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.

Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property

damage.

WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after

becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well

as with the applicable safety regulations.

Particular attention must be drawn to the following:

The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor

before any other electrical connection is made.

Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply

voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.

Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply

voltage (storage capacitors!)

The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even

during testing and commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other

measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and

maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are

disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

Page 194: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-2 Date: 2013-05-17

DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before

the current leads to the device are disconnected.

WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar

with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules

and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

11.3 Commission Tools

Minimum equipment required:

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.

Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V

respectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

Phase angle meter.

Phase rotation meter.

NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for

insulation resistance test when required).

A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be

tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

PCS-974 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.

11.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become

familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu

structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.

With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED

indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault

and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be

entered before changes can be made.

Page 195: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-3 Date: 2013-05-17

Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of

data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on

disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user

manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become

familiar with its operation.

11.5 Product Checks

These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has

not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity

measurements are within the stated tolerances.

If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is

advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done

by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.

11.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can

be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function

tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.

The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first

put into service.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware

defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by

self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces test

Binary input circuits and output circuits test

AC input circuits test

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of

the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.

Measuring elements test

Timers test

Metering and recording test

Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other

Page 196: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-4 Date: 2013-05-17

external equipment.

On load test.

Phase sequence check and polarity check.

11.5.1.1 Visual Inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the

internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed are

necessary.

Protection panel

Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to

see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.

The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct

for the particular installation.

Panel wiring

Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section

meeting the requirement.

Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label

Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to

make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Equipment plug-in modules

Check each plug-in module of the equipment on the panel to make sure that they are well

installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable

Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel

steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons

work normally and smoothly.

11.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be

done and they have not been performed during installation.

Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation

tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

Page 197: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-5 Date: 2013-05-17

Current transformer circuits

DC power supply

Optic-isolated control inputs

Output contacts

Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.

Test method:

To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each

circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected

to the protection.

11.5.1.3 External Wiring

Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.

Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.

Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the

customer’s normal practice.

11.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply

The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal

power supply rating.

The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Section 2.1.1, before

energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.

Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Section 2.1.1. See this section

for further details about the parameters of the power supply.

WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating

ranges in Section 2.1.2.

11.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly

and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.

The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these

checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the

associated circuit breaker.

11.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display

Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and

Page 198: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-6 Date: 2013-05-17

forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

11.5.2.2 Date and Time

If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time

should be set manually.

Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “CLOCK”.

In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on MON board, the time and date

will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct

and not need to set again.

To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being

re-energized, the time and date should be correct.

11.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that

the relay is healthy.

The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the

relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate

when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before

proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing

required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.

It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.

11.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs

Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We

need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the

equipment find serious errors in it.

Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will

light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.

11.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED

The “TRIP” LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However

the “TRIP” LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of the “TRIP”

LED is required at this stage.

11.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs

This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude by using a

multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance

must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

Page 199: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-7 Date: 2013-05-17

NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent

accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.

Group No. Item Input Measurement (on LCD)

Value Angle Value Angle

Three-phase current

Ia

Ib

Ic

11.5.2.7 Testing the Binary Inputs

This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.

The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for

terminal numbers.

Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.

The status of each binary input can be viewed by using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized

input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.

Binary inputs testing checkout

Terminal No. Signal Name BI Status on LCD Correct?

Test method:

To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the Insulation resistance test

for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected

to the protection.

11.5.3 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of

protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button

on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What

should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print

button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.

1) Trip event report

2) Binary input when protection devices start

Page 200: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

11 Commissioning

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-8 Date: 2013-05-17

3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start

4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE

5) The setting value when the protection device trips

11.5.4 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:

Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

Check the polarity of each current transformer.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the

tenderization of the plant being protected.

Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has

been removed to allow testing.

If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to

perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in

accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage

transformer wiring.

11.5.4.1 Final Checks

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been

necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the

wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with

the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.

Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.

If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit

breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the

test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.

Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared

and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Page 201: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

12 Maintenance

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-i Date: 2013-05-17

12 Maintenance

Table of Contents

12.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Failure Tracing and Repair .......................................................................... 12-1

12.3 Replace Failed Modules .............................................................................. 12-1

12.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 12-3

12.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 12-3

Page 202: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

12 Maintenance

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-ii Date: 2013-05-17

Page 203: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

12 Maintenance

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-1 Date: 2013-05-17

NR numerical relay PCS-974 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and

signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output

relays are hermetically sealed.

Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output

relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The

self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective

rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are

not required.

Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem

is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

12.1 Appearance Check

The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed well.

No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in the

case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good

feeling can be operated flexibly.

It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off. Never

allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary system

is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board when it is

unnecessary.

Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual inline

components must be well plugged.

12.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on

the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.

When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

Test circuit connections are correct

Modules are securely inserted in position

Correct power supply voltage is applied

Correct analog inputs are applied

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

12.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can

Page 204: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

12 Maintenance

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-2 Date: 2013-05-17

recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.

Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is

not recommended.

Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, DSP, BI, BO,

etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON or DSP module

replaced should have the same software version. In addition, the AI module, PWR module, BI

module, IO module and IO module replaced should have the same ratings.

The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in

LCD menu “Version Info”.

CAUTION: When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an

earthed wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many

of the electronic components could suffer damage. After replacing the MON or DSP

module, check the settings.

1) Replacing a module

Switch off the power supply

Disconnect the trip outputs

Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Unscrew the module.

WARNING: Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the

DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

Open the relay front panel

Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

Detach the HMI module from the relay

Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3) Replacing the AI, PWR, MON, DSP, BI, IO, BO module

Unscrew the module connector

Unplug the connector from the target module.

Unscrew the module.

Pull out the module

Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

Page 205: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

12 Maintenance

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-3 Date: 2013-05-17

After replacing the MON or DSP module, input the application-specific setting values again.

WARNING: Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off

and only by appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic

precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge.

WARNING: When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an

earthed wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise,

many of the electronic components could suffer damage. After replacing the MON or

DSP module, check the settings.

DANGER: After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set

as before the replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended

operation of switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons

may also be put in danger.

12.4 Cleaning

Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are

isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean

the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

12.5 Storage

The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard

60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to 70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C

to 40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

Page 206: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

12 Maintenance

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-4 Date: 2013-05-17

Page 207: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-a Date: 2013-05-17

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

Table of Contents

13.1 Decommissioning ........................................................................................ 13-1

13.1.1 Switching off ................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1.2 Disconnecting Cables ..................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1.3 Dismantling ..................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2 Disposal ........................................................................................................ 13-1

Page 208: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-b

Date: 2013-05-17

Page 209: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-1 Date: 2013-05-17

13.1 Decommissioning

13.1.1 Switching off

To switch off the PCS-974, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.

13.1.2 Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational

department.

DANGER! Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the PWR

module of the PCS-974 make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power

supply is switched off.

DANGER! Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module

with the primary CTs, make sure that the primary CTs aren’t in service.

13.1.3 Dismantling

The PCS-974 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may

also be removed.

DANGER! When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety

distance to live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

13.2 Disposal

In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.

NOTE! Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

Page 210: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-2

Date: 2013-05-17

Page 211: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

14 Manual Version History

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 14-1 Date: 2013-05-17

14 Manual Version History

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been

modified.

Manual version and modification history records

Manual

Version Software

Version Date Description of change

Source New

1.01 2.00 PCS-974FG-R2.00 2012.10.17 Add breaker failure protection and pole disagreement

protection.

2.00 2.01 PCS-974FG-R2.00 2013.05.17

1. Update the Management Function and Mechanical

Specifications in Chapter 2.

2. Updata the Dimensions of PCS-974 in Chapter 10.

Page 212: NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay

14 Manual Version History

PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 14-2

Date: 2013-05-17